Show More
@@ -0,0 +1,44 b'' | |||
|
1 | $ cat << EOF >> $HGRCPATH | |
|
2 | > [extensions] | |
|
3 | > rebase= | |
|
4 | > [alias] | |
|
5 | > tglog = log -G -T "{rev} '{desc}'\n" | |
|
6 | > EOF | |
|
7 | ||
|
8 | $ hg init | |
|
9 | ||
|
10 | $ echo a > a; hg add a; hg ci -m a | |
|
11 | $ echo b > b; hg add b; hg ci -m b1 | |
|
12 | $ hg up 0 -q | |
|
13 | $ echo b > b; hg add b; hg ci -m b2 -q | |
|
14 | ||
|
15 | $ hg tglog | |
|
16 | @ 2 'b2' | |
|
17 | | | |
|
18 | | o 1 'b1' | |
|
19 | |/ | |
|
20 | o 0 'a' | |
|
21 | ||
|
22 | ||
|
23 | With rewrite.empty-successor=skip, b2 is skipped because it would become empty. | |
|
24 | ||
|
25 | $ hg rebase -s 2 -d 1 --config rewrite.empty-successor=skip --dry-run | |
|
26 | starting dry-run rebase; repository will not be changed | |
|
27 | rebasing 2:6e2aad5e0f3c "b2" (tip) | |
|
28 | note: not rebasing 2:6e2aad5e0f3c "b2" (tip), its destination already has all its changes | |
|
29 | dry-run rebase completed successfully; run without -n/--dry-run to perform this rebase | |
|
30 | ||
|
31 | With rewrite.empty-successor=keep, b2 will be recreated although it became empty. | |
|
32 | ||
|
33 | $ hg rebase -s 2 -d 1 --config rewrite.empty-successor=keep | |
|
34 | rebasing 2:6e2aad5e0f3c "b2" (tip) | |
|
35 | note: created empty successor for 2:6e2aad5e0f3c "b2" (tip), its destination already has all its changes | |
|
36 | saved backup bundle to $TESTTMP/.hg/strip-backup/6e2aad5e0f3c-7d7c8801-rebase.hg | |
|
37 | ||
|
38 | $ hg tglog | |
|
39 | @ 2 'b2' | |
|
40 | | | |
|
41 | o 1 'b1' | |
|
42 | | | |
|
43 | o 0 'a' | |
|
44 |
@@ -1,2248 +1,2262 b'' | |||
|
1 | 1 | # rebase.py - rebasing feature for mercurial |
|
2 | 2 | # |
|
3 | 3 | # Copyright 2008 Stefano Tortarolo <stefano.tortarolo at gmail dot com> |
|
4 | 4 | # |
|
5 | 5 | # This software may be used and distributed according to the terms of the |
|
6 | 6 | # GNU General Public License version 2 or any later version. |
|
7 | 7 | |
|
8 | 8 | '''command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor |
|
9 | 9 | |
|
10 | 10 | This extension lets you rebase changesets in an existing Mercurial |
|
11 | 11 | repository. |
|
12 | 12 | |
|
13 | 13 | For more information: |
|
14 | 14 | https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension |
|
15 | 15 | ''' |
|
16 | 16 | |
|
17 | 17 | from __future__ import absolute_import |
|
18 | 18 | |
|
19 | 19 | import errno |
|
20 | 20 | import os |
|
21 | 21 | |
|
22 | 22 | from mercurial.i18n import _ |
|
23 | 23 | from mercurial.node import ( |
|
24 | 24 | nullrev, |
|
25 | 25 | short, |
|
26 | 26 | ) |
|
27 | 27 | from mercurial.pycompat import open |
|
28 | 28 | from mercurial import ( |
|
29 | 29 | bookmarks, |
|
30 | 30 | cmdutil, |
|
31 | 31 | commands, |
|
32 | 32 | copies, |
|
33 | 33 | destutil, |
|
34 | 34 | dirstateguard, |
|
35 | 35 | error, |
|
36 | 36 | extensions, |
|
37 | 37 | hg, |
|
38 | 38 | merge as mergemod, |
|
39 | 39 | mergestate as mergestatemod, |
|
40 | 40 | mergeutil, |
|
41 | 41 | node as nodemod, |
|
42 | 42 | obsolete, |
|
43 | 43 | obsutil, |
|
44 | 44 | patch, |
|
45 | 45 | phases, |
|
46 | 46 | pycompat, |
|
47 | 47 | registrar, |
|
48 | 48 | repair, |
|
49 | 49 | revset, |
|
50 | 50 | revsetlang, |
|
51 | 51 | rewriteutil, |
|
52 | 52 | scmutil, |
|
53 | 53 | smartset, |
|
54 | 54 | state as statemod, |
|
55 | 55 | util, |
|
56 | 56 | ) |
|
57 | 57 | |
|
58 | 58 | # The following constants are used throughout the rebase module. The ordering of |
|
59 | 59 | # their values must be maintained. |
|
60 | 60 | |
|
61 | 61 | # Indicates that a revision needs to be rebased |
|
62 | 62 | revtodo = -1 |
|
63 | 63 | revtodostr = b'-1' |
|
64 | 64 | |
|
65 | 65 | # legacy revstates no longer needed in current code |
|
66 | 66 | # -2: nullmerge, -3: revignored, -4: revprecursor, -5: revpruned |
|
67 | 67 | legacystates = {b'-2', b'-3', b'-4', b'-5'} |
|
68 | 68 | |
|
69 | 69 | cmdtable = {} |
|
70 | 70 | command = registrar.command(cmdtable) |
|
71 | 71 | # Note for extension authors: ONLY specify testedwith = 'ships-with-hg-core' for |
|
72 | 72 | # extensions which SHIP WITH MERCURIAL. Non-mainline extensions should |
|
73 | 73 | # be specifying the version(s) of Mercurial they are tested with, or |
|
74 | 74 | # leave the attribute unspecified. |
|
75 | 75 | testedwith = b'ships-with-hg-core' |
|
76 | 76 | |
|
77 | 77 | |
|
78 | 78 | def _nothingtorebase(): |
|
79 | 79 | return 1 |
|
80 | 80 | |
|
81 | 81 | |
|
82 | 82 | def _savegraft(ctx, extra): |
|
83 | 83 | s = ctx.extra().get(b'source', None) |
|
84 | 84 | if s is not None: |
|
85 | 85 | extra[b'source'] = s |
|
86 | 86 | s = ctx.extra().get(b'intermediate-source', None) |
|
87 | 87 | if s is not None: |
|
88 | 88 | extra[b'intermediate-source'] = s |
|
89 | 89 | |
|
90 | 90 | |
|
91 | 91 | def _savebranch(ctx, extra): |
|
92 | 92 | extra[b'branch'] = ctx.branch() |
|
93 | 93 | |
|
94 | 94 | |
|
95 | 95 | def _destrebase(repo, sourceset, destspace=None): |
|
96 | 96 | """small wrapper around destmerge to pass the right extra args |
|
97 | 97 | |
|
98 | 98 | Please wrap destutil.destmerge instead.""" |
|
99 | 99 | return destutil.destmerge( |
|
100 | 100 | repo, |
|
101 | 101 | action=b'rebase', |
|
102 | 102 | sourceset=sourceset, |
|
103 | 103 | onheadcheck=False, |
|
104 | 104 | destspace=destspace, |
|
105 | 105 | ) |
|
106 | 106 | |
|
107 | 107 | |
|
108 | 108 | revsetpredicate = registrar.revsetpredicate() |
|
109 | 109 | |
|
110 | 110 | |
|
111 | 111 | @revsetpredicate(b'_destrebase') |
|
112 | 112 | def _revsetdestrebase(repo, subset, x): |
|
113 | 113 | # ``_rebasedefaultdest()`` |
|
114 | 114 | |
|
115 | 115 | # default destination for rebase. |
|
116 | 116 | # # XXX: Currently private because I expect the signature to change. |
|
117 | 117 | # # XXX: - bailing out in case of ambiguity vs returning all data. |
|
118 | 118 | # i18n: "_rebasedefaultdest" is a keyword |
|
119 | 119 | sourceset = None |
|
120 | 120 | if x is not None: |
|
121 | 121 | sourceset = revset.getset(repo, smartset.fullreposet(repo), x) |
|
122 | 122 | return subset & smartset.baseset([_destrebase(repo, sourceset)]) |
|
123 | 123 | |
|
124 | 124 | |
|
125 | 125 | @revsetpredicate(b'_destautoorphanrebase') |
|
126 | 126 | def _revsetdestautoorphanrebase(repo, subset, x): |
|
127 | 127 | # ``_destautoorphanrebase()`` |
|
128 | 128 | |
|
129 | 129 | # automatic rebase destination for a single orphan revision. |
|
130 | 130 | unfi = repo.unfiltered() |
|
131 | 131 | obsoleted = unfi.revs(b'obsolete()') |
|
132 | 132 | |
|
133 | 133 | src = revset.getset(repo, subset, x).first() |
|
134 | 134 | |
|
135 | 135 | # Empty src or already obsoleted - Do not return a destination |
|
136 | 136 | if not src or src in obsoleted: |
|
137 | 137 | return smartset.baseset() |
|
138 | 138 | dests = destutil.orphanpossibledestination(repo, src) |
|
139 | 139 | if len(dests) > 1: |
|
140 | 140 | raise error.Abort( |
|
141 | 141 | _(b"ambiguous automatic rebase: %r could end up on any of %r") |
|
142 | 142 | % (src, dests) |
|
143 | 143 | ) |
|
144 | 144 | # We have zero or one destination, so we can just return here. |
|
145 | 145 | return smartset.baseset(dests) |
|
146 | 146 | |
|
147 | 147 | |
|
148 | 148 | def _ctxdesc(ctx): |
|
149 | 149 | """short description for a context""" |
|
150 | 150 | desc = b'%d:%s "%s"' % ( |
|
151 | 151 | ctx.rev(), |
|
152 | 152 | ctx, |
|
153 | 153 | ctx.description().split(b'\n', 1)[0], |
|
154 | 154 | ) |
|
155 | 155 | repo = ctx.repo() |
|
156 | 156 | names = [] |
|
157 | 157 | for nsname, ns in pycompat.iteritems(repo.names): |
|
158 | 158 | if nsname == b'branches': |
|
159 | 159 | continue |
|
160 | 160 | names.extend(ns.names(repo, ctx.node())) |
|
161 | 161 | if names: |
|
162 | 162 | desc += b' (%s)' % b' '.join(names) |
|
163 | 163 | return desc |
|
164 | 164 | |
|
165 | 165 | |
|
166 | 166 | class rebaseruntime(object): |
|
167 | 167 | """This class is a container for rebase runtime state""" |
|
168 | 168 | |
|
169 | 169 | def __init__(self, repo, ui, inmemory=False, opts=None): |
|
170 | 170 | if opts is None: |
|
171 | 171 | opts = {} |
|
172 | 172 | |
|
173 | 173 | # prepared: whether we have rebasestate prepared or not. Currently it |
|
174 | 174 | # decides whether "self.repo" is unfiltered or not. |
|
175 | 175 | # The rebasestate has explicit hash to hash instructions not depending |
|
176 | 176 | # on visibility. If rebasestate exists (in-memory or on-disk), use |
|
177 | 177 | # unfiltered repo to avoid visibility issues. |
|
178 | 178 | # Before knowing rebasestate (i.e. when starting a new rebase (not |
|
179 | 179 | # --continue or --abort)), the original repo should be used so |
|
180 | 180 | # visibility-dependent revsets are correct. |
|
181 | 181 | self.prepared = False |
|
182 | 182 | self.resume = False |
|
183 | 183 | self._repo = repo |
|
184 | 184 | |
|
185 | 185 | self.ui = ui |
|
186 | 186 | self.opts = opts |
|
187 | 187 | self.originalwd = None |
|
188 | 188 | self.external = nullrev |
|
189 | 189 | # Mapping between the old revision id and either what is the new rebased |
|
190 | 190 | # revision or what needs to be done with the old revision. The state |
|
191 | 191 | # dict will be what contains most of the rebase progress state. |
|
192 | 192 | self.state = {} |
|
193 | 193 | self.activebookmark = None |
|
194 | 194 | self.destmap = {} |
|
195 | 195 | self.skipped = set() |
|
196 | 196 | |
|
197 | 197 | self.collapsef = opts.get(b'collapse', False) |
|
198 | 198 | self.collapsemsg = cmdutil.logmessage(ui, opts) |
|
199 | 199 | self.date = opts.get(b'date', None) |
|
200 | 200 | |
|
201 | 201 | e = opts.get(b'extrafn') # internal, used by e.g. hgsubversion |
|
202 | 202 | self.extrafns = [_savegraft] |
|
203 | 203 | if e: |
|
204 | 204 | self.extrafns = [e] |
|
205 | 205 | |
|
206 | 206 | self.backupf = ui.configbool(b'rewrite', b'backup-bundle') |
|
207 | 207 | self.keepf = opts.get(b'keep', False) |
|
208 | 208 | self.keepbranchesf = opts.get(b'keepbranches', False) |
|
209 | self.skipemptysuccessorf = rewriteutil.skip_empty_successor( | |
|
210 | repo.ui, b'rebase' | |
|
211 | ) | |
|
209 | 212 | self.obsoletenotrebased = {} |
|
210 | 213 | self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination = set() |
|
211 | 214 | self.inmemory = inmemory |
|
212 | 215 | self.stateobj = statemod.cmdstate(repo, b'rebasestate') |
|
213 | 216 | |
|
214 | 217 | @property |
|
215 | 218 | def repo(self): |
|
216 | 219 | if self.prepared: |
|
217 | 220 | return self._repo.unfiltered() |
|
218 | 221 | else: |
|
219 | 222 | return self._repo |
|
220 | 223 | |
|
221 | 224 | def storestatus(self, tr=None): |
|
222 | 225 | """Store the current status to allow recovery""" |
|
223 | 226 | if tr: |
|
224 | 227 | tr.addfilegenerator( |
|
225 | 228 | b'rebasestate', |
|
226 | 229 | (b'rebasestate',), |
|
227 | 230 | self._writestatus, |
|
228 | 231 | location=b'plain', |
|
229 | 232 | ) |
|
230 | 233 | else: |
|
231 | 234 | with self.repo.vfs(b"rebasestate", b"w") as f: |
|
232 | 235 | self._writestatus(f) |
|
233 | 236 | |
|
234 | 237 | def _writestatus(self, f): |
|
235 | 238 | repo = self.repo |
|
236 | 239 | assert repo.filtername is None |
|
237 | 240 | f.write(repo[self.originalwd].hex() + b'\n') |
|
238 | 241 | # was "dest". we now write dest per src root below. |
|
239 | 242 | f.write(b'\n') |
|
240 | 243 | f.write(repo[self.external].hex() + b'\n') |
|
241 | 244 | f.write(b'%d\n' % int(self.collapsef)) |
|
242 | 245 | f.write(b'%d\n' % int(self.keepf)) |
|
243 | 246 | f.write(b'%d\n' % int(self.keepbranchesf)) |
|
244 | 247 | f.write(b'%s\n' % (self.activebookmark or b'')) |
|
245 | 248 | destmap = self.destmap |
|
246 | 249 | for d, v in pycompat.iteritems(self.state): |
|
247 | 250 | oldrev = repo[d].hex() |
|
248 | 251 | if v >= 0: |
|
249 | 252 | newrev = repo[v].hex() |
|
250 | 253 | else: |
|
251 | 254 | newrev = b"%d" % v |
|
252 | 255 | destnode = repo[destmap[d]].hex() |
|
253 | 256 | f.write(b"%s:%s:%s\n" % (oldrev, newrev, destnode)) |
|
254 | 257 | repo.ui.debug(b'rebase status stored\n') |
|
255 | 258 | |
|
256 | 259 | def restorestatus(self): |
|
257 | 260 | """Restore a previously stored status""" |
|
258 | 261 | if not self.stateobj.exists(): |
|
259 | 262 | cmdutil.wrongtooltocontinue(self.repo, _(b'rebase')) |
|
260 | 263 | |
|
261 | 264 | data = self._read() |
|
262 | 265 | self.repo.ui.debug(b'rebase status resumed\n') |
|
263 | 266 | |
|
264 | 267 | self.originalwd = data[b'originalwd'] |
|
265 | 268 | self.destmap = data[b'destmap'] |
|
266 | 269 | self.state = data[b'state'] |
|
267 | 270 | self.skipped = data[b'skipped'] |
|
268 | 271 | self.collapsef = data[b'collapse'] |
|
269 | 272 | self.keepf = data[b'keep'] |
|
270 | 273 | self.keepbranchesf = data[b'keepbranches'] |
|
271 | 274 | self.external = data[b'external'] |
|
272 | 275 | self.activebookmark = data[b'activebookmark'] |
|
273 | 276 | |
|
274 | 277 | def _read(self): |
|
275 | 278 | self.prepared = True |
|
276 | 279 | repo = self.repo |
|
277 | 280 | assert repo.filtername is None |
|
278 | 281 | data = { |
|
279 | 282 | b'keepbranches': None, |
|
280 | 283 | b'collapse': None, |
|
281 | 284 | b'activebookmark': None, |
|
282 | 285 | b'external': nullrev, |
|
283 | 286 | b'keep': None, |
|
284 | 287 | b'originalwd': None, |
|
285 | 288 | } |
|
286 | 289 | legacydest = None |
|
287 | 290 | state = {} |
|
288 | 291 | destmap = {} |
|
289 | 292 | |
|
290 | 293 | if True: |
|
291 | 294 | f = repo.vfs(b"rebasestate") |
|
292 | 295 | for i, l in enumerate(f.read().splitlines()): |
|
293 | 296 | if i == 0: |
|
294 | 297 | data[b'originalwd'] = repo[l].rev() |
|
295 | 298 | elif i == 1: |
|
296 | 299 | # this line should be empty in newer version. but legacy |
|
297 | 300 | # clients may still use it |
|
298 | 301 | if l: |
|
299 | 302 | legacydest = repo[l].rev() |
|
300 | 303 | elif i == 2: |
|
301 | 304 | data[b'external'] = repo[l].rev() |
|
302 | 305 | elif i == 3: |
|
303 | 306 | data[b'collapse'] = bool(int(l)) |
|
304 | 307 | elif i == 4: |
|
305 | 308 | data[b'keep'] = bool(int(l)) |
|
306 | 309 | elif i == 5: |
|
307 | 310 | data[b'keepbranches'] = bool(int(l)) |
|
308 | 311 | elif i == 6 and not (len(l) == 81 and b':' in l): |
|
309 | 312 | # line 6 is a recent addition, so for backwards |
|
310 | 313 | # compatibility check that the line doesn't look like the |
|
311 | 314 | # oldrev:newrev lines |
|
312 | 315 | data[b'activebookmark'] = l |
|
313 | 316 | else: |
|
314 | 317 | args = l.split(b':') |
|
315 | 318 | oldrev = repo[args[0]].rev() |
|
316 | 319 | newrev = args[1] |
|
317 | 320 | if newrev in legacystates: |
|
318 | 321 | continue |
|
319 | 322 | if len(args) > 2: |
|
320 | 323 | destrev = repo[args[2]].rev() |
|
321 | 324 | else: |
|
322 | 325 | destrev = legacydest |
|
323 | 326 | destmap[oldrev] = destrev |
|
324 | 327 | if newrev == revtodostr: |
|
325 | 328 | state[oldrev] = revtodo |
|
326 | 329 | # Legacy compat special case |
|
327 | 330 | else: |
|
328 | 331 | state[oldrev] = repo[newrev].rev() |
|
329 | 332 | |
|
330 | 333 | if data[b'keepbranches'] is None: |
|
331 | 334 | raise error.Abort(_(b'.hg/rebasestate is incomplete')) |
|
332 | 335 | |
|
333 | 336 | data[b'destmap'] = destmap |
|
334 | 337 | data[b'state'] = state |
|
335 | 338 | skipped = set() |
|
336 | 339 | # recompute the set of skipped revs |
|
337 | 340 | if not data[b'collapse']: |
|
338 | 341 | seen = set(destmap.values()) |
|
339 | 342 | for old, new in sorted(state.items()): |
|
340 | 343 | if new != revtodo and new in seen: |
|
341 | 344 | skipped.add(old) |
|
342 | 345 | seen.add(new) |
|
343 | 346 | data[b'skipped'] = skipped |
|
344 | 347 | repo.ui.debug( |
|
345 | 348 | b'computed skipped revs: %s\n' |
|
346 | 349 | % (b' '.join(b'%d' % r for r in sorted(skipped)) or b'') |
|
347 | 350 | ) |
|
348 | 351 | |
|
349 | 352 | return data |
|
350 | 353 | |
|
351 | 354 | def _handleskippingobsolete(self, obsoleterevs, destmap): |
|
352 | 355 | """Compute structures necessary for skipping obsolete revisions |
|
353 | 356 | |
|
354 | 357 | obsoleterevs: iterable of all obsolete revisions in rebaseset |
|
355 | 358 | destmap: {srcrev: destrev} destination revisions |
|
356 | 359 | """ |
|
357 | 360 | self.obsoletenotrebased = {} |
|
358 | 361 | if not self.ui.configbool(b'experimental', b'rebaseskipobsolete'): |
|
359 | 362 | return |
|
360 | 363 | obsoleteset = set(obsoleterevs) |
|
361 | 364 | ( |
|
362 | 365 | self.obsoletenotrebased, |
|
363 | 366 | self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination, |
|
364 | 367 | obsoleteextinctsuccessors, |
|
365 | 368 | ) = _computeobsoletenotrebased(self.repo, obsoleteset, destmap) |
|
366 | 369 | skippedset = set(self.obsoletenotrebased) |
|
367 | 370 | skippedset.update(self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination) |
|
368 | 371 | skippedset.update(obsoleteextinctsuccessors) |
|
369 | 372 | _checkobsrebase(self.repo, self.ui, obsoleteset, skippedset) |
|
370 | 373 | |
|
371 | 374 | def _prepareabortorcontinue( |
|
372 | 375 | self, isabort, backup=True, suppwarns=False, dryrun=False, confirm=False |
|
373 | 376 | ): |
|
374 | 377 | self.resume = True |
|
375 | 378 | try: |
|
376 | 379 | self.restorestatus() |
|
377 | 380 | self.collapsemsg = restorecollapsemsg(self.repo, isabort) |
|
378 | 381 | except error.RepoLookupError: |
|
379 | 382 | if isabort: |
|
380 | 383 | clearstatus(self.repo) |
|
381 | 384 | clearcollapsemsg(self.repo) |
|
382 | 385 | self.repo.ui.warn( |
|
383 | 386 | _( |
|
384 | 387 | b'rebase aborted (no revision is removed,' |
|
385 | 388 | b' only broken state is cleared)\n' |
|
386 | 389 | ) |
|
387 | 390 | ) |
|
388 | 391 | return 0 |
|
389 | 392 | else: |
|
390 | 393 | msg = _(b'cannot continue inconsistent rebase') |
|
391 | 394 | hint = _(b'use "hg rebase --abort" to clear broken state') |
|
392 | 395 | raise error.Abort(msg, hint=hint) |
|
393 | 396 | |
|
394 | 397 | if isabort: |
|
395 | 398 | backup = backup and self.backupf |
|
396 | 399 | return self._abort( |
|
397 | 400 | backup=backup, |
|
398 | 401 | suppwarns=suppwarns, |
|
399 | 402 | dryrun=dryrun, |
|
400 | 403 | confirm=confirm, |
|
401 | 404 | ) |
|
402 | 405 | |
|
403 | 406 | def _preparenewrebase(self, destmap): |
|
404 | 407 | if not destmap: |
|
405 | 408 | return _nothingtorebase() |
|
406 | 409 | |
|
407 | 410 | rebaseset = destmap.keys() |
|
408 | 411 | if not self.keepf: |
|
409 | 412 | try: |
|
410 | 413 | rewriteutil.precheck(self.repo, rebaseset, action=b'rebase') |
|
411 | 414 | except error.Abort as e: |
|
412 | 415 | if e.hint is None: |
|
413 | 416 | e.hint = _(b'use --keep to keep original changesets') |
|
414 | 417 | raise e |
|
415 | 418 | |
|
416 | 419 | result = buildstate(self.repo, destmap, self.collapsef) |
|
417 | 420 | |
|
418 | 421 | if not result: |
|
419 | 422 | # Empty state built, nothing to rebase |
|
420 | 423 | self.ui.status(_(b'nothing to rebase\n')) |
|
421 | 424 | return _nothingtorebase() |
|
422 | 425 | |
|
423 | 426 | (self.originalwd, self.destmap, self.state) = result |
|
424 | 427 | if self.collapsef: |
|
425 | 428 | dests = set(self.destmap.values()) |
|
426 | 429 | if len(dests) != 1: |
|
427 | 430 | raise error.Abort( |
|
428 | 431 | _(b'--collapse does not work with multiple destinations') |
|
429 | 432 | ) |
|
430 | 433 | destrev = next(iter(dests)) |
|
431 | 434 | destancestors = self.repo.changelog.ancestors( |
|
432 | 435 | [destrev], inclusive=True |
|
433 | 436 | ) |
|
434 | 437 | self.external = externalparent(self.repo, self.state, destancestors) |
|
435 | 438 | |
|
436 | 439 | for destrev in sorted(set(destmap.values())): |
|
437 | 440 | dest = self.repo[destrev] |
|
438 | 441 | if dest.closesbranch() and not self.keepbranchesf: |
|
439 | 442 | self.ui.status(_(b'reopening closed branch head %s\n') % dest) |
|
440 | 443 | |
|
441 | 444 | self.prepared = True |
|
442 | 445 | |
|
443 | 446 | def _assignworkingcopy(self): |
|
444 | 447 | if self.inmemory: |
|
445 | 448 | from mercurial.context import overlayworkingctx |
|
446 | 449 | |
|
447 | 450 | self.wctx = overlayworkingctx(self.repo) |
|
448 | 451 | self.repo.ui.debug(b"rebasing in-memory\n") |
|
449 | 452 | else: |
|
450 | 453 | self.wctx = self.repo[None] |
|
451 | 454 | self.repo.ui.debug(b"rebasing on disk\n") |
|
452 | 455 | self.repo.ui.log( |
|
453 | 456 | b"rebase", |
|
454 | 457 | b"using in-memory rebase: %r\n", |
|
455 | 458 | self.inmemory, |
|
456 | 459 | rebase_imm_used=self.inmemory, |
|
457 | 460 | ) |
|
458 | 461 | |
|
459 | 462 | def _performrebase(self, tr): |
|
460 | 463 | self._assignworkingcopy() |
|
461 | 464 | repo, ui = self.repo, self.ui |
|
462 | 465 | if self.keepbranchesf: |
|
463 | 466 | # insert _savebranch at the start of extrafns so if |
|
464 | 467 | # there's a user-provided extrafn it can clobber branch if |
|
465 | 468 | # desired |
|
466 | 469 | self.extrafns.insert(0, _savebranch) |
|
467 | 470 | if self.collapsef: |
|
468 | 471 | branches = set() |
|
469 | 472 | for rev in self.state: |
|
470 | 473 | branches.add(repo[rev].branch()) |
|
471 | 474 | if len(branches) > 1: |
|
472 | 475 | raise error.Abort( |
|
473 | 476 | _(b'cannot collapse multiple named branches') |
|
474 | 477 | ) |
|
475 | 478 | |
|
476 | 479 | # Calculate self.obsoletenotrebased |
|
477 | 480 | obsrevs = _filterobsoleterevs(self.repo, self.state) |
|
478 | 481 | self._handleskippingobsolete(obsrevs, self.destmap) |
|
479 | 482 | |
|
480 | 483 | # Keep track of the active bookmarks in order to reset them later |
|
481 | 484 | self.activebookmark = self.activebookmark or repo._activebookmark |
|
482 | 485 | if self.activebookmark: |
|
483 | 486 | bookmarks.deactivate(repo) |
|
484 | 487 | |
|
485 | 488 | # Store the state before we begin so users can run 'hg rebase --abort' |
|
486 | 489 | # if we fail before the transaction closes. |
|
487 | 490 | self.storestatus() |
|
488 | 491 | if tr: |
|
489 | 492 | # When using single transaction, store state when transaction |
|
490 | 493 | # commits. |
|
491 | 494 | self.storestatus(tr) |
|
492 | 495 | |
|
493 | 496 | cands = [k for k, v in pycompat.iteritems(self.state) if v == revtodo] |
|
494 | 497 | p = repo.ui.makeprogress( |
|
495 | 498 | _(b"rebasing"), unit=_(b'changesets'), total=len(cands) |
|
496 | 499 | ) |
|
497 | 500 | |
|
498 | 501 | def progress(ctx): |
|
499 | 502 | p.increment(item=(b"%d:%s" % (ctx.rev(), ctx))) |
|
500 | 503 | |
|
501 | 504 | allowdivergence = self.ui.configbool( |
|
502 | 505 | b'experimental', b'evolution.allowdivergence' |
|
503 | 506 | ) |
|
504 | 507 | for subset in sortsource(self.destmap): |
|
505 | 508 | sortedrevs = self.repo.revs(b'sort(%ld, -topo)', subset) |
|
506 | 509 | if not allowdivergence: |
|
507 | 510 | sortedrevs -= self.repo.revs( |
|
508 | 511 | b'descendants(%ld) and not %ld', |
|
509 | 512 | self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination, |
|
510 | 513 | self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination, |
|
511 | 514 | ) |
|
512 | 515 | for rev in sortedrevs: |
|
513 | 516 | self._rebasenode(tr, rev, allowdivergence, progress) |
|
514 | 517 | p.complete() |
|
515 | 518 | ui.note(_(b'rebase merging completed\n')) |
|
516 | 519 | |
|
517 | 520 | def _concludenode(self, rev, p1, editor, commitmsg=None): |
|
518 | 521 | '''Commit the wd changes with parents p1 and p2. |
|
519 | 522 | |
|
520 | 523 | Reuse commit info from rev but also store useful information in extra. |
|
521 | 524 | Return node of committed revision.''' |
|
522 | 525 | repo = self.repo |
|
523 | 526 | ctx = repo[rev] |
|
524 | 527 | if commitmsg is None: |
|
525 | 528 | commitmsg = ctx.description() |
|
526 | 529 | date = self.date |
|
527 | 530 | if date is None: |
|
528 | 531 | date = ctx.date() |
|
529 | 532 | extra = {b'rebase_source': ctx.hex()} |
|
530 | 533 | for c in self.extrafns: |
|
531 | 534 | c(ctx, extra) |
|
532 | 535 | destphase = max(ctx.phase(), phases.draft) |
|
533 | overrides = {(b'phases', b'new-commit'): destphase} | |
|
536 | overrides = { | |
|
537 | (b'phases', b'new-commit'): destphase, | |
|
538 | (b'ui', b'allowemptycommit'): not self.skipemptysuccessorf, | |
|
539 | } | |
|
534 | 540 | with repo.ui.configoverride(overrides, b'rebase'): |
|
535 | 541 | if self.inmemory: |
|
536 | 542 | newnode = commitmemorynode( |
|
537 | 543 | repo, |
|
538 | 544 | wctx=self.wctx, |
|
539 | 545 | extra=extra, |
|
540 | 546 | commitmsg=commitmsg, |
|
541 | 547 | editor=editor, |
|
542 | 548 | user=ctx.user(), |
|
543 | 549 | date=date, |
|
544 | 550 | ) |
|
545 | 551 | mergestatemod.mergestate.clean(repo) |
|
546 | 552 | else: |
|
547 | 553 | newnode = commitnode( |
|
548 | 554 | repo, |
|
549 | 555 | extra=extra, |
|
550 | 556 | commitmsg=commitmsg, |
|
551 | 557 | editor=editor, |
|
552 | 558 | user=ctx.user(), |
|
553 | 559 | date=date, |
|
554 | 560 | ) |
|
555 | 561 | |
|
556 | 562 | return newnode |
|
557 | 563 | |
|
558 | 564 | def _rebasenode(self, tr, rev, allowdivergence, progressfn): |
|
559 | 565 | repo, ui, opts = self.repo, self.ui, self.opts |
|
560 | 566 | dest = self.destmap[rev] |
|
561 | 567 | ctx = repo[rev] |
|
562 | 568 | desc = _ctxdesc(ctx) |
|
563 | 569 | if self.state[rev] == rev: |
|
564 | 570 | ui.status(_(b'already rebased %s\n') % desc) |
|
565 | 571 | elif ( |
|
566 | 572 | not allowdivergence |
|
567 | 573 | and rev in self.obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination |
|
568 | 574 | ): |
|
569 | 575 | msg = ( |
|
570 | 576 | _( |
|
571 | 577 | b'note: not rebasing %s and its descendants as ' |
|
572 | 578 | b'this would cause divergence\n' |
|
573 | 579 | ) |
|
574 | 580 | % desc |
|
575 | 581 | ) |
|
576 | 582 | repo.ui.status(msg) |
|
577 | 583 | self.skipped.add(rev) |
|
578 | 584 | elif rev in self.obsoletenotrebased: |
|
579 | 585 | succ = self.obsoletenotrebased[rev] |
|
580 | 586 | if succ is None: |
|
581 | 587 | msg = _(b'note: not rebasing %s, it has no successor\n') % desc |
|
582 | 588 | else: |
|
583 | 589 | succdesc = _ctxdesc(repo[succ]) |
|
584 | 590 | msg = _( |
|
585 | 591 | b'note: not rebasing %s, already in destination as %s\n' |
|
586 | 592 | ) % (desc, succdesc) |
|
587 | 593 | repo.ui.status(msg) |
|
588 | 594 | # Make clearrebased aware state[rev] is not a true successor |
|
589 | 595 | self.skipped.add(rev) |
|
590 | 596 | # Record rev as moved to its desired destination in self.state. |
|
591 | 597 | # This helps bookmark and working parent movement. |
|
592 | 598 | dest = max( |
|
593 | 599 | adjustdest(repo, rev, self.destmap, self.state, self.skipped) |
|
594 | 600 | ) |
|
595 | 601 | self.state[rev] = dest |
|
596 | 602 | elif self.state[rev] == revtodo: |
|
597 | 603 | ui.status(_(b'rebasing %s\n') % desc) |
|
598 | 604 | progressfn(ctx) |
|
599 | 605 | p1, p2, base = defineparents( |
|
600 | 606 | repo, |
|
601 | 607 | rev, |
|
602 | 608 | self.destmap, |
|
603 | 609 | self.state, |
|
604 | 610 | self.skipped, |
|
605 | 611 | self.obsoletenotrebased, |
|
606 | 612 | ) |
|
607 | 613 | if self.resume and self.wctx.p1().rev() == p1: |
|
608 | 614 | repo.ui.debug(b'resuming interrupted rebase\n') |
|
609 | 615 | self.resume = False |
|
610 | 616 | else: |
|
611 | 617 | overrides = {(b'ui', b'forcemerge'): opts.get(b'tool', b'')} |
|
612 | 618 | with ui.configoverride(overrides, b'rebase'): |
|
613 | 619 | stats = rebasenode( |
|
614 | 620 | repo, |
|
615 | 621 | rev, |
|
616 | 622 | p1, |
|
617 | 623 | p2, |
|
618 | 624 | base, |
|
619 | 625 | self.collapsef, |
|
620 | 626 | dest, |
|
621 | 627 | wctx=self.wctx, |
|
622 | 628 | ) |
|
623 | 629 | if stats.unresolvedcount > 0: |
|
624 | 630 | if self.inmemory: |
|
625 | 631 | raise error.InMemoryMergeConflictsError() |
|
626 | 632 | else: |
|
627 | 633 | raise error.InterventionRequired( |
|
628 | 634 | _( |
|
629 | 635 | b'unresolved conflicts (see hg ' |
|
630 | 636 | b'resolve, then hg rebase --continue)' |
|
631 | 637 | ) |
|
632 | 638 | ) |
|
633 | 639 | if not self.collapsef: |
|
634 | 640 | merging = p2 != nullrev |
|
635 | 641 | editform = cmdutil.mergeeditform(merging, b'rebase') |
|
636 | 642 | editor = cmdutil.getcommiteditor( |
|
637 | 643 | editform=editform, **pycompat.strkwargs(opts) |
|
638 | 644 | ) |
|
639 | 645 | # We need to set parents again here just in case we're continuing |
|
640 | 646 | # a rebase started with an old hg version (before 9c9cfecd4600), |
|
641 | 647 | # because those old versions would have left us with two dirstate |
|
642 | 648 | # parents, and we don't want to create a merge commit here (unless |
|
643 | 649 | # we're rebasing a merge commit). |
|
644 | 650 | self.wctx.setparents(repo[p1].node(), repo[p2].node()) |
|
645 | 651 | newnode = self._concludenode(rev, p1, editor) |
|
646 | 652 | else: |
|
647 | 653 | # Skip commit if we are collapsing |
|
648 | 654 | newnode = None |
|
649 | 655 | # Update the state |
|
650 | 656 | if newnode is not None: |
|
651 | 657 | self.state[rev] = repo[newnode].rev() |
|
652 | 658 | ui.debug(b'rebased as %s\n' % short(newnode)) |
|
659 | if repo[newnode].isempty(): | |
|
660 | ui.warn( | |
|
661 | _( | |
|
662 | b'note: created empty successor for %s, its ' | |
|
663 | b'destination already has all its changes\n' | |
|
664 | ) | |
|
665 | % desc | |
|
666 | ) | |
|
653 | 667 | else: |
|
654 | 668 | if not self.collapsef: |
|
655 | 669 | ui.warn( |
|
656 | 670 | _( |
|
657 | 671 | b'note: not rebasing %s, its destination already ' |
|
658 | 672 | b'has all its changes\n' |
|
659 | 673 | ) |
|
660 | 674 | % desc |
|
661 | 675 | ) |
|
662 | 676 | self.skipped.add(rev) |
|
663 | 677 | self.state[rev] = p1 |
|
664 | 678 | ui.debug(b'next revision set to %d\n' % p1) |
|
665 | 679 | else: |
|
666 | 680 | ui.status( |
|
667 | 681 | _(b'already rebased %s as %s\n') % (desc, repo[self.state[rev]]) |
|
668 | 682 | ) |
|
669 | 683 | if not tr: |
|
670 | 684 | # When not using single transaction, store state after each |
|
671 | 685 | # commit is completely done. On InterventionRequired, we thus |
|
672 | 686 | # won't store the status. Instead, we'll hit the "len(parents) == 2" |
|
673 | 687 | # case and realize that the commit was in progress. |
|
674 | 688 | self.storestatus() |
|
675 | 689 | |
|
676 | 690 | def _finishrebase(self): |
|
677 | 691 | repo, ui, opts = self.repo, self.ui, self.opts |
|
678 | 692 | fm = ui.formatter(b'rebase', opts) |
|
679 | 693 | fm.startitem() |
|
680 | 694 | if self.collapsef: |
|
681 | 695 | p1, p2, _base = defineparents( |
|
682 | 696 | repo, |
|
683 | 697 | min(self.state), |
|
684 | 698 | self.destmap, |
|
685 | 699 | self.state, |
|
686 | 700 | self.skipped, |
|
687 | 701 | self.obsoletenotrebased, |
|
688 | 702 | ) |
|
689 | 703 | editopt = opts.get(b'edit') |
|
690 | 704 | editform = b'rebase.collapse' |
|
691 | 705 | if self.collapsemsg: |
|
692 | 706 | commitmsg = self.collapsemsg |
|
693 | 707 | else: |
|
694 | 708 | commitmsg = b'Collapsed revision' |
|
695 | 709 | for rebased in sorted(self.state): |
|
696 | 710 | if rebased not in self.skipped: |
|
697 | 711 | commitmsg += b'\n* %s' % repo[rebased].description() |
|
698 | 712 | editopt = True |
|
699 | 713 | editor = cmdutil.getcommiteditor(edit=editopt, editform=editform) |
|
700 | 714 | revtoreuse = max(self.state) |
|
701 | 715 | |
|
702 | 716 | self.wctx.setparents(repo[p1].node(), repo[self.external].node()) |
|
703 | 717 | newnode = self._concludenode( |
|
704 | 718 | revtoreuse, p1, editor, commitmsg=commitmsg |
|
705 | 719 | ) |
|
706 | 720 | |
|
707 | 721 | if newnode is not None: |
|
708 | 722 | newrev = repo[newnode].rev() |
|
709 | 723 | for oldrev in self.state: |
|
710 | 724 | self.state[oldrev] = newrev |
|
711 | 725 | |
|
712 | 726 | if b'qtip' in repo.tags(): |
|
713 | 727 | updatemq(repo, self.state, self.skipped, **pycompat.strkwargs(opts)) |
|
714 | 728 | |
|
715 | 729 | # restore original working directory |
|
716 | 730 | # (we do this before stripping) |
|
717 | 731 | newwd = self.state.get(self.originalwd, self.originalwd) |
|
718 | 732 | if newwd < 0: |
|
719 | 733 | # original directory is a parent of rebase set root or ignored |
|
720 | 734 | newwd = self.originalwd |
|
721 | 735 | if newwd not in [c.rev() for c in repo[None].parents()]: |
|
722 | 736 | ui.note(_(b"update back to initial working directory parent\n")) |
|
723 | 737 | hg.updaterepo(repo, newwd, overwrite=False) |
|
724 | 738 | |
|
725 | 739 | collapsedas = None |
|
726 | 740 | if self.collapsef and not self.keepf: |
|
727 | 741 | collapsedas = newnode |
|
728 | 742 | clearrebased( |
|
729 | 743 | ui, |
|
730 | 744 | repo, |
|
731 | 745 | self.destmap, |
|
732 | 746 | self.state, |
|
733 | 747 | self.skipped, |
|
734 | 748 | collapsedas, |
|
735 | 749 | self.keepf, |
|
736 | 750 | fm=fm, |
|
737 | 751 | backup=self.backupf, |
|
738 | 752 | ) |
|
739 | 753 | |
|
740 | 754 | clearstatus(repo) |
|
741 | 755 | clearcollapsemsg(repo) |
|
742 | 756 | |
|
743 | 757 | ui.note(_(b"rebase completed\n")) |
|
744 | 758 | util.unlinkpath(repo.sjoin(b'undo'), ignoremissing=True) |
|
745 | 759 | if self.skipped: |
|
746 | 760 | skippedlen = len(self.skipped) |
|
747 | 761 | ui.note(_(b"%d revisions have been skipped\n") % skippedlen) |
|
748 | 762 | fm.end() |
|
749 | 763 | |
|
750 | 764 | if ( |
|
751 | 765 | self.activebookmark |
|
752 | 766 | and self.activebookmark in repo._bookmarks |
|
753 | 767 | and repo[b'.'].node() == repo._bookmarks[self.activebookmark] |
|
754 | 768 | ): |
|
755 | 769 | bookmarks.activate(repo, self.activebookmark) |
|
756 | 770 | |
|
757 | 771 | def _abort(self, backup=True, suppwarns=False, dryrun=False, confirm=False): |
|
758 | 772 | '''Restore the repository to its original state.''' |
|
759 | 773 | |
|
760 | 774 | repo = self.repo |
|
761 | 775 | try: |
|
762 | 776 | # If the first commits in the rebased set get skipped during the |
|
763 | 777 | # rebase, their values within the state mapping will be the dest |
|
764 | 778 | # rev id. The rebased list must must not contain the dest rev |
|
765 | 779 | # (issue4896) |
|
766 | 780 | rebased = [ |
|
767 | 781 | s |
|
768 | 782 | for r, s in self.state.items() |
|
769 | 783 | if s >= 0 and s != r and s != self.destmap[r] |
|
770 | 784 | ] |
|
771 | 785 | immutable = [d for d in rebased if not repo[d].mutable()] |
|
772 | 786 | cleanup = True |
|
773 | 787 | if immutable: |
|
774 | 788 | repo.ui.warn( |
|
775 | 789 | _(b"warning: can't clean up public changesets %s\n") |
|
776 | 790 | % b', '.join(bytes(repo[r]) for r in immutable), |
|
777 | 791 | hint=_(b"see 'hg help phases' for details"), |
|
778 | 792 | ) |
|
779 | 793 | cleanup = False |
|
780 | 794 | |
|
781 | 795 | descendants = set() |
|
782 | 796 | if rebased: |
|
783 | 797 | descendants = set(repo.changelog.descendants(rebased)) |
|
784 | 798 | if descendants - set(rebased): |
|
785 | 799 | repo.ui.warn( |
|
786 | 800 | _( |
|
787 | 801 | b"warning: new changesets detected on " |
|
788 | 802 | b"destination branch, can't strip\n" |
|
789 | 803 | ) |
|
790 | 804 | ) |
|
791 | 805 | cleanup = False |
|
792 | 806 | |
|
793 | 807 | if cleanup: |
|
794 | 808 | if rebased: |
|
795 | 809 | strippoints = [ |
|
796 | 810 | c.node() for c in repo.set(b'roots(%ld)', rebased) |
|
797 | 811 | ] |
|
798 | 812 | |
|
799 | 813 | updateifonnodes = set(rebased) |
|
800 | 814 | updateifonnodes.update(self.destmap.values()) |
|
801 | 815 | |
|
802 | 816 | if not dryrun and not confirm: |
|
803 | 817 | updateifonnodes.add(self.originalwd) |
|
804 | 818 | |
|
805 | 819 | shouldupdate = repo[b'.'].rev() in updateifonnodes |
|
806 | 820 | |
|
807 | 821 | # Update away from the rebase if necessary |
|
808 | 822 | if shouldupdate: |
|
809 | 823 | mergemod.clean_update(repo[self.originalwd]) |
|
810 | 824 | |
|
811 | 825 | # Strip from the first rebased revision |
|
812 | 826 | if rebased: |
|
813 | 827 | repair.strip(repo.ui, repo, strippoints, backup=backup) |
|
814 | 828 | |
|
815 | 829 | if self.activebookmark and self.activebookmark in repo._bookmarks: |
|
816 | 830 | bookmarks.activate(repo, self.activebookmark) |
|
817 | 831 | |
|
818 | 832 | finally: |
|
819 | 833 | clearstatus(repo) |
|
820 | 834 | clearcollapsemsg(repo) |
|
821 | 835 | if not suppwarns: |
|
822 | 836 | repo.ui.warn(_(b'rebase aborted\n')) |
|
823 | 837 | return 0 |
|
824 | 838 | |
|
825 | 839 | |
|
826 | 840 | @command( |
|
827 | 841 | b'rebase', |
|
828 | 842 | [ |
|
829 | 843 | ( |
|
830 | 844 | b's', |
|
831 | 845 | b'source', |
|
832 | 846 | [], |
|
833 | 847 | _(b'rebase the specified changesets and their descendants'), |
|
834 | 848 | _(b'REV'), |
|
835 | 849 | ), |
|
836 | 850 | ( |
|
837 | 851 | b'b', |
|
838 | 852 | b'base', |
|
839 | 853 | [], |
|
840 | 854 | _(b'rebase everything from branching point of specified changeset'), |
|
841 | 855 | _(b'REV'), |
|
842 | 856 | ), |
|
843 | 857 | (b'r', b'rev', [], _(b'rebase these revisions'), _(b'REV')), |
|
844 | 858 | ( |
|
845 | 859 | b'd', |
|
846 | 860 | b'dest', |
|
847 | 861 | b'', |
|
848 | 862 | _(b'rebase onto the specified changeset'), |
|
849 | 863 | _(b'REV'), |
|
850 | 864 | ), |
|
851 | 865 | (b'', b'collapse', False, _(b'collapse the rebased changesets')), |
|
852 | 866 | ( |
|
853 | 867 | b'm', |
|
854 | 868 | b'message', |
|
855 | 869 | b'', |
|
856 | 870 | _(b'use text as collapse commit message'), |
|
857 | 871 | _(b'TEXT'), |
|
858 | 872 | ), |
|
859 | 873 | (b'e', b'edit', False, _(b'invoke editor on commit messages')), |
|
860 | 874 | ( |
|
861 | 875 | b'l', |
|
862 | 876 | b'logfile', |
|
863 | 877 | b'', |
|
864 | 878 | _(b'read collapse commit message from file'), |
|
865 | 879 | _(b'FILE'), |
|
866 | 880 | ), |
|
867 | 881 | (b'k', b'keep', False, _(b'keep original changesets')), |
|
868 | 882 | (b'', b'keepbranches', False, _(b'keep original branch names')), |
|
869 | 883 | (b'D', b'detach', False, _(b'(DEPRECATED)')), |
|
870 | 884 | (b'i', b'interactive', False, _(b'(DEPRECATED)')), |
|
871 | 885 | (b't', b'tool', b'', _(b'specify merge tool')), |
|
872 | 886 | (b'', b'stop', False, _(b'stop interrupted rebase')), |
|
873 | 887 | (b'c', b'continue', False, _(b'continue an interrupted rebase')), |
|
874 | 888 | (b'a', b'abort', False, _(b'abort an interrupted rebase')), |
|
875 | 889 | ( |
|
876 | 890 | b'', |
|
877 | 891 | b'auto-orphans', |
|
878 | 892 | b'', |
|
879 | 893 | _( |
|
880 | 894 | b'automatically rebase orphan revisions ' |
|
881 | 895 | b'in the specified revset (EXPERIMENTAL)' |
|
882 | 896 | ), |
|
883 | 897 | ), |
|
884 | 898 | ] |
|
885 | 899 | + cmdutil.dryrunopts |
|
886 | 900 | + cmdutil.formatteropts |
|
887 | 901 | + cmdutil.confirmopts, |
|
888 | 902 | _(b'[[-s REV]... | [-b REV]... | [-r REV]...] [-d REV] [OPTION]...'), |
|
889 | 903 | helpcategory=command.CATEGORY_CHANGE_MANAGEMENT, |
|
890 | 904 | ) |
|
891 | 905 | def rebase(ui, repo, **opts): |
|
892 | 906 | """move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch |
|
893 | 907 | |
|
894 | 908 | Rebase uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of |
|
895 | 909 | history (the source) onto another (the destination). This can be |
|
896 | 910 | useful for linearizing *local* changes relative to a master |
|
897 | 911 | development tree. |
|
898 | 912 | |
|
899 | 913 | Published commits cannot be rebased (see :hg:`help phases`). |
|
900 | 914 | To copy commits, see :hg:`help graft`. |
|
901 | 915 | |
|
902 | 916 | If you don't specify a destination changeset (``-d/--dest``), rebase |
|
903 | 917 | will use the same logic as :hg:`merge` to pick a destination. if |
|
904 | 918 | the current branch contains exactly one other head, the other head |
|
905 | 919 | is merged with by default. Otherwise, an explicit revision with |
|
906 | 920 | which to merge with must be provided. (destination changeset is not |
|
907 | 921 | modified by rebasing, but new changesets are added as its |
|
908 | 922 | descendants.) |
|
909 | 923 | |
|
910 | 924 | Here are the ways to select changesets: |
|
911 | 925 | |
|
912 | 926 | 1. Explicitly select them using ``--rev``. |
|
913 | 927 | |
|
914 | 928 | 2. Use ``--source`` to select a root changeset and include all of its |
|
915 | 929 | descendants. |
|
916 | 930 | |
|
917 | 931 | 3. Use ``--base`` to select a changeset; rebase will find ancestors |
|
918 | 932 | and their descendants which are not also ancestors of the destination. |
|
919 | 933 | |
|
920 | 934 | 4. If you do not specify any of ``--rev``, ``--source``, or ``--base``, |
|
921 | 935 | rebase will use ``--base .`` as above. |
|
922 | 936 | |
|
923 | 937 | If ``--source`` or ``--rev`` is used, special names ``SRC`` and ``ALLSRC`` |
|
924 | 938 | can be used in ``--dest``. Destination would be calculated per source |
|
925 | 939 | revision with ``SRC`` substituted by that single source revision and |
|
926 | 940 | ``ALLSRC`` substituted by all source revisions. |
|
927 | 941 | |
|
928 | 942 | Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use ``--keep``. |
|
929 | 943 | It will also move your bookmarks (even if you do). |
|
930 | 944 | |
|
931 | 945 | Some changesets may be dropped if they do not contribute changes |
|
932 | 946 | (e.g. merges from the destination branch). |
|
933 | 947 | |
|
934 | 948 | Unlike ``merge``, rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip of |
|
935 | 949 | a named branch with two heads. You will need to explicitly specify source |
|
936 | 950 | and/or destination. |
|
937 | 951 | |
|
938 | 952 | If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions, you |
|
939 | 953 | can specify one with ``--tool``, see :hg:`help merge-tools`. |
|
940 | 954 | As a caveat: the tool will not be used to mediate when a file was |
|
941 | 955 | deleted, there is no hook presently available for this. |
|
942 | 956 | |
|
943 | 957 | If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict, it can be |
|
944 | 958 | continued with --continue/-c, aborted with --abort/-a, or stopped with |
|
945 | 959 | --stop. |
|
946 | 960 | |
|
947 | 961 | .. container:: verbose |
|
948 | 962 | |
|
949 | 963 | Examples: |
|
950 | 964 | |
|
951 | 965 | - move "local changes" (current commit back to branching point) |
|
952 | 966 | to the current branch tip after a pull:: |
|
953 | 967 | |
|
954 | 968 | hg rebase |
|
955 | 969 | |
|
956 | 970 | - move a single changeset to the stable branch:: |
|
957 | 971 | |
|
958 | 972 | hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable |
|
959 | 973 | |
|
960 | 974 | - splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of history:: |
|
961 | 975 | |
|
962 | 976 | hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9 |
|
963 | 977 | |
|
964 | 978 | - rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto the |
|
965 | 979 | default branch:: |
|
966 | 980 | |
|
967 | 981 | hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default |
|
968 | 982 | |
|
969 | 983 | - collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit:: |
|
970 | 984 | |
|
971 | 985 | hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d . |
|
972 | 986 | |
|
973 | 987 | - move a named branch while preserving its name:: |
|
974 | 988 | |
|
975 | 989 | hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches |
|
976 | 990 | |
|
977 | 991 | - stabilize orphaned changesets so history looks linear:: |
|
978 | 992 | |
|
979 | 993 | hg rebase -r 'orphan()-obsolete()'\ |
|
980 | 994 | -d 'first(max((successors(max(roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete())::) +\ |
|
981 | 995 | max(::((roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete()))' |
|
982 | 996 | |
|
983 | 997 | Configuration Options: |
|
984 | 998 | |
|
985 | 999 | You can make rebase require a destination if you set the following config |
|
986 | 1000 | option:: |
|
987 | 1001 | |
|
988 | 1002 | [commands] |
|
989 | 1003 | rebase.requiredest = True |
|
990 | 1004 | |
|
991 | 1005 | By default, rebase will close the transaction after each commit. For |
|
992 | 1006 | performance purposes, you can configure rebase to use a single transaction |
|
993 | 1007 | across the entire rebase. WARNING: This setting introduces a significant |
|
994 | 1008 | risk of losing the work you've done in a rebase if the rebase aborts |
|
995 | 1009 | unexpectedly:: |
|
996 | 1010 | |
|
997 | 1011 | [rebase] |
|
998 | 1012 | singletransaction = True |
|
999 | 1013 | |
|
1000 | 1014 | By default, rebase writes to the working copy, but you can configure it to |
|
1001 | 1015 | run in-memory for better performance. When the rebase is not moving the |
|
1002 | 1016 | parent(s) of the working copy (AKA the "currently checked out changesets"), |
|
1003 | 1017 | this may also allow it to run even if the working copy is dirty:: |
|
1004 | 1018 | |
|
1005 | 1019 | [rebase] |
|
1006 | 1020 | experimental.inmemory = True |
|
1007 | 1021 | |
|
1008 | 1022 | Return Values: |
|
1009 | 1023 | |
|
1010 | 1024 | Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or there are |
|
1011 | 1025 | unresolved conflicts. |
|
1012 | 1026 | |
|
1013 | 1027 | """ |
|
1014 | 1028 | opts = pycompat.byteskwargs(opts) |
|
1015 | 1029 | inmemory = ui.configbool(b'rebase', b'experimental.inmemory') |
|
1016 | 1030 | action = cmdutil.check_at_most_one_arg(opts, b'abort', b'stop', b'continue') |
|
1017 | 1031 | if action: |
|
1018 | 1032 | cmdutil.check_incompatible_arguments( |
|
1019 | 1033 | opts, action, [b'confirm', b'dry_run'] |
|
1020 | 1034 | ) |
|
1021 | 1035 | cmdutil.check_incompatible_arguments( |
|
1022 | 1036 | opts, action, [b'rev', b'source', b'base', b'dest'] |
|
1023 | 1037 | ) |
|
1024 | 1038 | cmdutil.check_at_most_one_arg(opts, b'confirm', b'dry_run') |
|
1025 | 1039 | cmdutil.check_at_most_one_arg(opts, b'rev', b'source', b'base') |
|
1026 | 1040 | |
|
1027 | 1041 | if action or repo.currenttransaction() is not None: |
|
1028 | 1042 | # in-memory rebase is not compatible with resuming rebases. |
|
1029 | 1043 | # (Or if it is run within a transaction, since the restart logic can |
|
1030 | 1044 | # fail the entire transaction.) |
|
1031 | 1045 | inmemory = False |
|
1032 | 1046 | |
|
1033 | 1047 | if opts.get(b'auto_orphans'): |
|
1034 | 1048 | disallowed_opts = set(opts) - {b'auto_orphans'} |
|
1035 | 1049 | cmdutil.check_incompatible_arguments( |
|
1036 | 1050 | opts, b'auto_orphans', disallowed_opts |
|
1037 | 1051 | ) |
|
1038 | 1052 | |
|
1039 | 1053 | userrevs = list(repo.revs(opts.get(b'auto_orphans'))) |
|
1040 | 1054 | opts[b'rev'] = [revsetlang.formatspec(b'%ld and orphan()', userrevs)] |
|
1041 | 1055 | opts[b'dest'] = b'_destautoorphanrebase(SRC)' |
|
1042 | 1056 | |
|
1043 | 1057 | if opts.get(b'dry_run') or opts.get(b'confirm'): |
|
1044 | 1058 | return _dryrunrebase(ui, repo, action, opts) |
|
1045 | 1059 | elif action == b'stop': |
|
1046 | 1060 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui) |
|
1047 | 1061 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
1048 | 1062 | rbsrt.restorestatus() |
|
1049 | 1063 | if rbsrt.collapsef: |
|
1050 | 1064 | raise error.Abort(_(b"cannot stop in --collapse session")) |
|
1051 | 1065 | allowunstable = obsolete.isenabled(repo, obsolete.allowunstableopt) |
|
1052 | 1066 | if not (rbsrt.keepf or allowunstable): |
|
1053 | 1067 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1054 | 1068 | _( |
|
1055 | 1069 | b"cannot remove original changesets with" |
|
1056 | 1070 | b" unrebased descendants" |
|
1057 | 1071 | ), |
|
1058 | 1072 | hint=_( |
|
1059 | 1073 | b'either enable obsmarkers to allow unstable ' |
|
1060 | 1074 | b'revisions or use --keep to keep original ' |
|
1061 | 1075 | b'changesets' |
|
1062 | 1076 | ), |
|
1063 | 1077 | ) |
|
1064 | 1078 | # update to the current working revision |
|
1065 | 1079 | # to clear interrupted merge |
|
1066 | 1080 | hg.updaterepo(repo, rbsrt.originalwd, overwrite=True) |
|
1067 | 1081 | rbsrt._finishrebase() |
|
1068 | 1082 | return 0 |
|
1069 | 1083 | elif inmemory: |
|
1070 | 1084 | try: |
|
1071 | 1085 | # in-memory merge doesn't support conflicts, so if we hit any, abort |
|
1072 | 1086 | # and re-run as an on-disk merge. |
|
1073 | 1087 | overrides = {(b'rebase', b'singletransaction'): True} |
|
1074 | 1088 | with ui.configoverride(overrides, b'rebase'): |
|
1075 | 1089 | return _dorebase(ui, repo, action, opts, inmemory=inmemory) |
|
1076 | 1090 | except error.InMemoryMergeConflictsError: |
|
1077 | 1091 | ui.warn( |
|
1078 | 1092 | _( |
|
1079 | 1093 | b'hit merge conflicts; re-running rebase without in-memory' |
|
1080 | 1094 | b' merge\n' |
|
1081 | 1095 | ) |
|
1082 | 1096 | ) |
|
1083 | 1097 | # TODO: Make in-memory merge not use the on-disk merge state, so |
|
1084 | 1098 | # we don't have to clean it here |
|
1085 | 1099 | mergestatemod.mergestate.clean(repo) |
|
1086 | 1100 | clearstatus(repo) |
|
1087 | 1101 | clearcollapsemsg(repo) |
|
1088 | 1102 | return _dorebase(ui, repo, action, opts, inmemory=False) |
|
1089 | 1103 | else: |
|
1090 | 1104 | return _dorebase(ui, repo, action, opts) |
|
1091 | 1105 | |
|
1092 | 1106 | |
|
1093 | 1107 | def _dryrunrebase(ui, repo, action, opts): |
|
1094 | 1108 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui, inmemory=True, opts=opts) |
|
1095 | 1109 | confirm = opts.get(b'confirm') |
|
1096 | 1110 | if confirm: |
|
1097 | 1111 | ui.status(_(b'starting in-memory rebase\n')) |
|
1098 | 1112 | else: |
|
1099 | 1113 | ui.status( |
|
1100 | 1114 | _(b'starting dry-run rebase; repository will not be changed\n') |
|
1101 | 1115 | ) |
|
1102 | 1116 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
1103 | 1117 | needsabort = True |
|
1104 | 1118 | try: |
|
1105 | 1119 | overrides = {(b'rebase', b'singletransaction'): True} |
|
1106 | 1120 | with ui.configoverride(overrides, b'rebase'): |
|
1107 | 1121 | _origrebase( |
|
1108 | 1122 | ui, |
|
1109 | 1123 | repo, |
|
1110 | 1124 | action, |
|
1111 | 1125 | opts, |
|
1112 | 1126 | rbsrt, |
|
1113 | 1127 | inmemory=True, |
|
1114 | 1128 | leaveunfinished=True, |
|
1115 | 1129 | ) |
|
1116 | 1130 | except error.InMemoryMergeConflictsError: |
|
1117 | 1131 | ui.status(_(b'hit a merge conflict\n')) |
|
1118 | 1132 | return 1 |
|
1119 | 1133 | except error.Abort: |
|
1120 | 1134 | needsabort = False |
|
1121 | 1135 | raise |
|
1122 | 1136 | else: |
|
1123 | 1137 | if confirm: |
|
1124 | 1138 | ui.status(_(b'rebase completed successfully\n')) |
|
1125 | 1139 | if not ui.promptchoice(_(b'apply changes (yn)?$$ &Yes $$ &No')): |
|
1126 | 1140 | # finish unfinished rebase |
|
1127 | 1141 | rbsrt._finishrebase() |
|
1128 | 1142 | else: |
|
1129 | 1143 | rbsrt._prepareabortorcontinue( |
|
1130 | 1144 | isabort=True, |
|
1131 | 1145 | backup=False, |
|
1132 | 1146 | suppwarns=True, |
|
1133 | 1147 | confirm=confirm, |
|
1134 | 1148 | ) |
|
1135 | 1149 | needsabort = False |
|
1136 | 1150 | else: |
|
1137 | 1151 | ui.status( |
|
1138 | 1152 | _( |
|
1139 | 1153 | b'dry-run rebase completed successfully; run without' |
|
1140 | 1154 | b' -n/--dry-run to perform this rebase\n' |
|
1141 | 1155 | ) |
|
1142 | 1156 | ) |
|
1143 | 1157 | return 0 |
|
1144 | 1158 | finally: |
|
1145 | 1159 | if needsabort: |
|
1146 | 1160 | # no need to store backup in case of dryrun |
|
1147 | 1161 | rbsrt._prepareabortorcontinue( |
|
1148 | 1162 | isabort=True, |
|
1149 | 1163 | backup=False, |
|
1150 | 1164 | suppwarns=True, |
|
1151 | 1165 | dryrun=opts.get(b'dry_run'), |
|
1152 | 1166 | ) |
|
1153 | 1167 | |
|
1154 | 1168 | |
|
1155 | 1169 | def _dorebase(ui, repo, action, opts, inmemory=False): |
|
1156 | 1170 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui, inmemory, opts) |
|
1157 | 1171 | return _origrebase(ui, repo, action, opts, rbsrt, inmemory=inmemory) |
|
1158 | 1172 | |
|
1159 | 1173 | |
|
1160 | 1174 | def _origrebase( |
|
1161 | 1175 | ui, repo, action, opts, rbsrt, inmemory=False, leaveunfinished=False |
|
1162 | 1176 | ): |
|
1163 | 1177 | assert action != b'stop' |
|
1164 | 1178 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
1165 | 1179 | if opts.get(b'interactive'): |
|
1166 | 1180 | try: |
|
1167 | 1181 | if extensions.find(b'histedit'): |
|
1168 | 1182 | enablehistedit = b'' |
|
1169 | 1183 | except KeyError: |
|
1170 | 1184 | enablehistedit = b" --config extensions.histedit=" |
|
1171 | 1185 | help = b"hg%s help -e histedit" % enablehistedit |
|
1172 | 1186 | msg = ( |
|
1173 | 1187 | _( |
|
1174 | 1188 | b"interactive history editing is supported by the " |
|
1175 | 1189 | b"'histedit' extension (see \"%s\")" |
|
1176 | 1190 | ) |
|
1177 | 1191 | % help |
|
1178 | 1192 | ) |
|
1179 | 1193 | raise error.Abort(msg) |
|
1180 | 1194 | |
|
1181 | 1195 | if rbsrt.collapsemsg and not rbsrt.collapsef: |
|
1182 | 1196 | raise error.Abort(_(b'message can only be specified with collapse')) |
|
1183 | 1197 | |
|
1184 | 1198 | if action: |
|
1185 | 1199 | if rbsrt.collapsef: |
|
1186 | 1200 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1187 | 1201 | _(b'cannot use collapse with continue or abort') |
|
1188 | 1202 | ) |
|
1189 | 1203 | if action == b'abort' and opts.get(b'tool', False): |
|
1190 | 1204 | ui.warn(_(b'tool option will be ignored\n')) |
|
1191 | 1205 | if action == b'continue': |
|
1192 | 1206 | ms = mergestatemod.mergestate.read(repo) |
|
1193 | 1207 | mergeutil.checkunresolved(ms) |
|
1194 | 1208 | |
|
1195 | 1209 | retcode = rbsrt._prepareabortorcontinue( |
|
1196 | 1210 | isabort=(action == b'abort') |
|
1197 | 1211 | ) |
|
1198 | 1212 | if retcode is not None: |
|
1199 | 1213 | return retcode |
|
1200 | 1214 | else: |
|
1201 | 1215 | # search default destination in this space |
|
1202 | 1216 | # used in the 'hg pull --rebase' case, see issue 5214. |
|
1203 | 1217 | destspace = opts.get(b'_destspace') |
|
1204 | 1218 | destmap = _definedestmap( |
|
1205 | 1219 | ui, |
|
1206 | 1220 | repo, |
|
1207 | 1221 | inmemory, |
|
1208 | 1222 | opts.get(b'dest', None), |
|
1209 | 1223 | opts.get(b'source', []), |
|
1210 | 1224 | opts.get(b'base', []), |
|
1211 | 1225 | opts.get(b'rev', []), |
|
1212 | 1226 | destspace=destspace, |
|
1213 | 1227 | ) |
|
1214 | 1228 | retcode = rbsrt._preparenewrebase(destmap) |
|
1215 | 1229 | if retcode is not None: |
|
1216 | 1230 | return retcode |
|
1217 | 1231 | storecollapsemsg(repo, rbsrt.collapsemsg) |
|
1218 | 1232 | |
|
1219 | 1233 | tr = None |
|
1220 | 1234 | |
|
1221 | 1235 | singletr = ui.configbool(b'rebase', b'singletransaction') |
|
1222 | 1236 | if singletr: |
|
1223 | 1237 | tr = repo.transaction(b'rebase') |
|
1224 | 1238 | |
|
1225 | 1239 | # If `rebase.singletransaction` is enabled, wrap the entire operation in |
|
1226 | 1240 | # one transaction here. Otherwise, transactions are obtained when |
|
1227 | 1241 | # committing each node, which is slower but allows partial success. |
|
1228 | 1242 | with util.acceptintervention(tr): |
|
1229 | 1243 | # Same logic for the dirstate guard, except we don't create one when |
|
1230 | 1244 | # rebasing in-memory (it's not needed). |
|
1231 | 1245 | dsguard = None |
|
1232 | 1246 | if singletr and not inmemory: |
|
1233 | 1247 | dsguard = dirstateguard.dirstateguard(repo, b'rebase') |
|
1234 | 1248 | with util.acceptintervention(dsguard): |
|
1235 | 1249 | rbsrt._performrebase(tr) |
|
1236 | 1250 | if not leaveunfinished: |
|
1237 | 1251 | rbsrt._finishrebase() |
|
1238 | 1252 | |
|
1239 | 1253 | |
|
1240 | 1254 | def _definedestmap(ui, repo, inmemory, destf, srcf, basef, revf, destspace): |
|
1241 | 1255 | """use revisions argument to define destmap {srcrev: destrev}""" |
|
1242 | 1256 | if revf is None: |
|
1243 | 1257 | revf = [] |
|
1244 | 1258 | |
|
1245 | 1259 | # destspace is here to work around issues with `hg pull --rebase` see |
|
1246 | 1260 | # issue5214 for details |
|
1247 | 1261 | |
|
1248 | 1262 | cmdutil.checkunfinished(repo) |
|
1249 | 1263 | if not inmemory: |
|
1250 | 1264 | cmdutil.bailifchanged(repo) |
|
1251 | 1265 | |
|
1252 | 1266 | if ui.configbool(b'commands', b'rebase.requiredest') and not destf: |
|
1253 | 1267 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1254 | 1268 | _(b'you must specify a destination'), |
|
1255 | 1269 | hint=_(b'use: hg rebase -d REV'), |
|
1256 | 1270 | ) |
|
1257 | 1271 | |
|
1258 | 1272 | dest = None |
|
1259 | 1273 | |
|
1260 | 1274 | if revf: |
|
1261 | 1275 | rebaseset = scmutil.revrange(repo, revf) |
|
1262 | 1276 | if not rebaseset: |
|
1263 | 1277 | ui.status(_(b'empty "rev" revision set - nothing to rebase\n')) |
|
1264 | 1278 | return None |
|
1265 | 1279 | elif srcf: |
|
1266 | 1280 | src = scmutil.revrange(repo, srcf) |
|
1267 | 1281 | if not src: |
|
1268 | 1282 | ui.status(_(b'empty "source" revision set - nothing to rebase\n')) |
|
1269 | 1283 | return None |
|
1270 | 1284 | # `+ (%ld)` to work around `wdir()::` being empty |
|
1271 | 1285 | rebaseset = repo.revs(b'(%ld):: + (%ld)', src, src) |
|
1272 | 1286 | else: |
|
1273 | 1287 | base = scmutil.revrange(repo, basef or [b'.']) |
|
1274 | 1288 | if not base: |
|
1275 | 1289 | ui.status( |
|
1276 | 1290 | _(b'empty "base" revision set - ' b"can't compute rebase set\n") |
|
1277 | 1291 | ) |
|
1278 | 1292 | return None |
|
1279 | 1293 | if destf: |
|
1280 | 1294 | # --base does not support multiple destinations |
|
1281 | 1295 | dest = scmutil.revsingle(repo, destf) |
|
1282 | 1296 | else: |
|
1283 | 1297 | dest = repo[_destrebase(repo, base, destspace=destspace)] |
|
1284 | 1298 | destf = bytes(dest) |
|
1285 | 1299 | |
|
1286 | 1300 | roots = [] # selected children of branching points |
|
1287 | 1301 | bpbase = {} # {branchingpoint: [origbase]} |
|
1288 | 1302 | for b in base: # group bases by branching points |
|
1289 | 1303 | bp = repo.revs(b'ancestor(%d, %d)', b, dest.rev()).first() |
|
1290 | 1304 | bpbase[bp] = bpbase.get(bp, []) + [b] |
|
1291 | 1305 | if None in bpbase: |
|
1292 | 1306 | # emulate the old behavior, showing "nothing to rebase" (a better |
|
1293 | 1307 | # behavior may be abort with "cannot find branching point" error) |
|
1294 | 1308 | bpbase.clear() |
|
1295 | 1309 | for bp, bs in pycompat.iteritems(bpbase): # calculate roots |
|
1296 | 1310 | roots += list(repo.revs(b'children(%d) & ancestors(%ld)', bp, bs)) |
|
1297 | 1311 | |
|
1298 | 1312 | rebaseset = repo.revs(b'%ld::', roots) |
|
1299 | 1313 | |
|
1300 | 1314 | if not rebaseset: |
|
1301 | 1315 | # transform to list because smartsets are not comparable to |
|
1302 | 1316 | # lists. This should be improved to honor laziness of |
|
1303 | 1317 | # smartset. |
|
1304 | 1318 | if list(base) == [dest.rev()]: |
|
1305 | 1319 | if basef: |
|
1306 | 1320 | ui.status( |
|
1307 | 1321 | _( |
|
1308 | 1322 | b'nothing to rebase - %s is both "base"' |
|
1309 | 1323 | b' and destination\n' |
|
1310 | 1324 | ) |
|
1311 | 1325 | % dest |
|
1312 | 1326 | ) |
|
1313 | 1327 | else: |
|
1314 | 1328 | ui.status( |
|
1315 | 1329 | _( |
|
1316 | 1330 | b'nothing to rebase - working directory ' |
|
1317 | 1331 | b'parent is also destination\n' |
|
1318 | 1332 | ) |
|
1319 | 1333 | ) |
|
1320 | 1334 | elif not repo.revs(b'%ld - ::%d', base, dest.rev()): |
|
1321 | 1335 | if basef: |
|
1322 | 1336 | ui.status( |
|
1323 | 1337 | _( |
|
1324 | 1338 | b'nothing to rebase - "base" %s is ' |
|
1325 | 1339 | b'already an ancestor of destination ' |
|
1326 | 1340 | b'%s\n' |
|
1327 | 1341 | ) |
|
1328 | 1342 | % (b'+'.join(bytes(repo[r]) for r in base), dest) |
|
1329 | 1343 | ) |
|
1330 | 1344 | else: |
|
1331 | 1345 | ui.status( |
|
1332 | 1346 | _( |
|
1333 | 1347 | b'nothing to rebase - working ' |
|
1334 | 1348 | b'directory parent is already an ' |
|
1335 | 1349 | b'ancestor of destination %s\n' |
|
1336 | 1350 | ) |
|
1337 | 1351 | % dest |
|
1338 | 1352 | ) |
|
1339 | 1353 | else: # can it happen? |
|
1340 | 1354 | ui.status( |
|
1341 | 1355 | _(b'nothing to rebase from %s to %s\n') |
|
1342 | 1356 | % (b'+'.join(bytes(repo[r]) for r in base), dest) |
|
1343 | 1357 | ) |
|
1344 | 1358 | return None |
|
1345 | 1359 | |
|
1346 | 1360 | if nodemod.wdirrev in rebaseset: |
|
1347 | 1361 | raise error.Abort(_(b'cannot rebase the working copy')) |
|
1348 | 1362 | rebasingwcp = repo[b'.'].rev() in rebaseset |
|
1349 | 1363 | ui.log( |
|
1350 | 1364 | b"rebase", |
|
1351 | 1365 | b"rebasing working copy parent: %r\n", |
|
1352 | 1366 | rebasingwcp, |
|
1353 | 1367 | rebase_rebasing_wcp=rebasingwcp, |
|
1354 | 1368 | ) |
|
1355 | 1369 | if inmemory and rebasingwcp: |
|
1356 | 1370 | # Check these since we did not before. |
|
1357 | 1371 | cmdutil.checkunfinished(repo) |
|
1358 | 1372 | cmdutil.bailifchanged(repo) |
|
1359 | 1373 | |
|
1360 | 1374 | if not destf: |
|
1361 | 1375 | dest = repo[_destrebase(repo, rebaseset, destspace=destspace)] |
|
1362 | 1376 | destf = bytes(dest) |
|
1363 | 1377 | |
|
1364 | 1378 | allsrc = revsetlang.formatspec(b'%ld', rebaseset) |
|
1365 | 1379 | alias = {b'ALLSRC': allsrc} |
|
1366 | 1380 | |
|
1367 | 1381 | if dest is None: |
|
1368 | 1382 | try: |
|
1369 | 1383 | # fast path: try to resolve dest without SRC alias |
|
1370 | 1384 | dest = scmutil.revsingle(repo, destf, localalias=alias) |
|
1371 | 1385 | except error.RepoLookupError: |
|
1372 | 1386 | # multi-dest path: resolve dest for each SRC separately |
|
1373 | 1387 | destmap = {} |
|
1374 | 1388 | for r in rebaseset: |
|
1375 | 1389 | alias[b'SRC'] = revsetlang.formatspec(b'%d', r) |
|
1376 | 1390 | # use repo.anyrevs instead of scmutil.revsingle because we |
|
1377 | 1391 | # don't want to abort if destset is empty. |
|
1378 | 1392 | destset = repo.anyrevs([destf], user=True, localalias=alias) |
|
1379 | 1393 | size = len(destset) |
|
1380 | 1394 | if size == 1: |
|
1381 | 1395 | destmap[r] = destset.first() |
|
1382 | 1396 | elif size == 0: |
|
1383 | 1397 | ui.note(_(b'skipping %s - empty destination\n') % repo[r]) |
|
1384 | 1398 | else: |
|
1385 | 1399 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1386 | 1400 | _(b'rebase destination for %s is not unique') % repo[r] |
|
1387 | 1401 | ) |
|
1388 | 1402 | |
|
1389 | 1403 | if dest is not None: |
|
1390 | 1404 | # single-dest case: assign dest to each rev in rebaseset |
|
1391 | 1405 | destrev = dest.rev() |
|
1392 | 1406 | destmap = {r: destrev for r in rebaseset} # {srcrev: destrev} |
|
1393 | 1407 | |
|
1394 | 1408 | if not destmap: |
|
1395 | 1409 | ui.status(_(b'nothing to rebase - empty destination\n')) |
|
1396 | 1410 | return None |
|
1397 | 1411 | |
|
1398 | 1412 | return destmap |
|
1399 | 1413 | |
|
1400 | 1414 | |
|
1401 | 1415 | def externalparent(repo, state, destancestors): |
|
1402 | 1416 | """Return the revision that should be used as the second parent |
|
1403 | 1417 | when the revisions in state is collapsed on top of destancestors. |
|
1404 | 1418 | Abort if there is more than one parent. |
|
1405 | 1419 | """ |
|
1406 | 1420 | parents = set() |
|
1407 | 1421 | source = min(state) |
|
1408 | 1422 | for rev in state: |
|
1409 | 1423 | if rev == source: |
|
1410 | 1424 | continue |
|
1411 | 1425 | for p in repo[rev].parents(): |
|
1412 | 1426 | if p.rev() not in state and p.rev() not in destancestors: |
|
1413 | 1427 | parents.add(p.rev()) |
|
1414 | 1428 | if not parents: |
|
1415 | 1429 | return nullrev |
|
1416 | 1430 | if len(parents) == 1: |
|
1417 | 1431 | return parents.pop() |
|
1418 | 1432 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1419 | 1433 | _( |
|
1420 | 1434 | b'unable to collapse on top of %d, there is more ' |
|
1421 | 1435 | b'than one external parent: %s' |
|
1422 | 1436 | ) |
|
1423 | 1437 | % (max(destancestors), b', '.join(b"%d" % p for p in sorted(parents))) |
|
1424 | 1438 | ) |
|
1425 | 1439 | |
|
1426 | 1440 | |
|
1427 | 1441 | def commitmemorynode(repo, wctx, editor, extra, user, date, commitmsg): |
|
1428 | 1442 | '''Commit the memory changes with parents p1 and p2. |
|
1429 | 1443 | Return node of committed revision.''' |
|
1430 | 1444 | # By convention, ``extra['branch']`` (set by extrafn) clobbers |
|
1431 | 1445 | # ``branch`` (used when passing ``--keepbranches``). |
|
1432 | 1446 | branch = None |
|
1433 | 1447 | if b'branch' in extra: |
|
1434 | 1448 | branch = extra[b'branch'] |
|
1435 | 1449 | |
|
1436 | 1450 | memctx = wctx.tomemctx( |
|
1437 | 1451 | commitmsg, |
|
1438 | 1452 | date=date, |
|
1439 | 1453 | extra=extra, |
|
1440 | 1454 | user=user, |
|
1441 | 1455 | branch=branch, |
|
1442 | 1456 | editor=editor, |
|
1443 | 1457 | ) |
|
1444 | 1458 | if memctx.isempty() and not repo.ui.configbool(b'ui', b'allowemptycommit'): |
|
1445 | 1459 | return None |
|
1446 | 1460 | commitres = repo.commitctx(memctx) |
|
1447 | 1461 | wctx.clean() # Might be reused |
|
1448 | 1462 | return commitres |
|
1449 | 1463 | |
|
1450 | 1464 | |
|
1451 | 1465 | def commitnode(repo, editor, extra, user, date, commitmsg): |
|
1452 | 1466 | '''Commit the wd changes with parents p1 and p2. |
|
1453 | 1467 | Return node of committed revision.''' |
|
1454 | 1468 | dsguard = util.nullcontextmanager() |
|
1455 | 1469 | if not repo.ui.configbool(b'rebase', b'singletransaction'): |
|
1456 | 1470 | dsguard = dirstateguard.dirstateguard(repo, b'rebase') |
|
1457 | 1471 | with dsguard: |
|
1458 | 1472 | # Commit might fail if unresolved files exist |
|
1459 | 1473 | newnode = repo.commit( |
|
1460 | 1474 | text=commitmsg, user=user, date=date, extra=extra, editor=editor |
|
1461 | 1475 | ) |
|
1462 | 1476 | |
|
1463 | 1477 | repo.dirstate.setbranch(repo[newnode].branch()) |
|
1464 | 1478 | return newnode |
|
1465 | 1479 | |
|
1466 | 1480 | |
|
1467 | 1481 | def rebasenode(repo, rev, p1, p2, base, collapse, dest, wctx): |
|
1468 | 1482 | """Rebase a single revision rev on top of p1 using base as merge ancestor""" |
|
1469 | 1483 | # Merge phase |
|
1470 | 1484 | # Update to destination and merge it with local |
|
1471 | 1485 | p1ctx = repo[p1] |
|
1472 | 1486 | if wctx.isinmemory(): |
|
1473 | 1487 | wctx.setbase(p1ctx) |
|
1474 | 1488 | else: |
|
1475 | 1489 | if repo[b'.'].rev() != p1: |
|
1476 | 1490 | repo.ui.debug(b" update to %d:%s\n" % (p1, p1ctx)) |
|
1477 | 1491 | mergemod.clean_update(p1ctx) |
|
1478 | 1492 | else: |
|
1479 | 1493 | repo.ui.debug(b" already in destination\n") |
|
1480 | 1494 | # This is, alas, necessary to invalidate workingctx's manifest cache, |
|
1481 | 1495 | # as well as other data we litter on it in other places. |
|
1482 | 1496 | wctx = repo[None] |
|
1483 | 1497 | repo.dirstate.write(repo.currenttransaction()) |
|
1484 | 1498 | ctx = repo[rev] |
|
1485 | 1499 | repo.ui.debug(b" merge against %d:%s\n" % (rev, ctx)) |
|
1486 | 1500 | if base is not None: |
|
1487 | 1501 | repo.ui.debug(b" detach base %d:%s\n" % (base, repo[base])) |
|
1488 | 1502 | |
|
1489 | 1503 | # See explanation in merge.graft() |
|
1490 | 1504 | mergeancestor = repo.changelog.isancestor(p1ctx.node(), ctx.node()) |
|
1491 | 1505 | stats = mergemod.update( |
|
1492 | 1506 | repo, |
|
1493 | 1507 | rev, |
|
1494 | 1508 | branchmerge=True, |
|
1495 | 1509 | force=True, |
|
1496 | 1510 | ancestor=base, |
|
1497 | 1511 | mergeancestor=mergeancestor, |
|
1498 | 1512 | labels=[b'dest', b'source'], |
|
1499 | 1513 | wc=wctx, |
|
1500 | 1514 | ) |
|
1501 | 1515 | wctx.setparents(p1ctx.node(), repo[p2].node()) |
|
1502 | 1516 | if collapse: |
|
1503 | 1517 | copies.graftcopies(wctx, ctx, repo[dest]) |
|
1504 | 1518 | else: |
|
1505 | 1519 | # If we're not using --collapse, we need to |
|
1506 | 1520 | # duplicate copies between the revision we're |
|
1507 | 1521 | # rebasing and its first parent. |
|
1508 | 1522 | copies.graftcopies(wctx, ctx, ctx.p1()) |
|
1509 | 1523 | return stats |
|
1510 | 1524 | |
|
1511 | 1525 | |
|
1512 | 1526 | def adjustdest(repo, rev, destmap, state, skipped): |
|
1513 | 1527 | r"""adjust rebase destination given the current rebase state |
|
1514 | 1528 | |
|
1515 | 1529 | rev is what is being rebased. Return a list of two revs, which are the |
|
1516 | 1530 | adjusted destinations for rev's p1 and p2, respectively. If a parent is |
|
1517 | 1531 | nullrev, return dest without adjustment for it. |
|
1518 | 1532 | |
|
1519 | 1533 | For example, when doing rebasing B+E to F, C to G, rebase will first move B |
|
1520 | 1534 | to B1, and E's destination will be adjusted from F to B1. |
|
1521 | 1535 | |
|
1522 | 1536 | B1 <- written during rebasing B |
|
1523 | 1537 | | |
|
1524 | 1538 | F <- original destination of B, E |
|
1525 | 1539 | | |
|
1526 | 1540 | | E <- rev, which is being rebased |
|
1527 | 1541 | | | |
|
1528 | 1542 | | D <- prev, one parent of rev being checked |
|
1529 | 1543 | | | |
|
1530 | 1544 | | x <- skipped, ex. no successor or successor in (::dest) |
|
1531 | 1545 | | | |
|
1532 | 1546 | | C <- rebased as C', different destination |
|
1533 | 1547 | | | |
|
1534 | 1548 | | B <- rebased as B1 C' |
|
1535 | 1549 | |/ | |
|
1536 | 1550 | A G <- destination of C, different |
|
1537 | 1551 | |
|
1538 | 1552 | Another example about merge changeset, rebase -r C+G+H -d K, rebase will |
|
1539 | 1553 | first move C to C1, G to G1, and when it's checking H, the adjusted |
|
1540 | 1554 | destinations will be [C1, G1]. |
|
1541 | 1555 | |
|
1542 | 1556 | H C1 G1 |
|
1543 | 1557 | /| | / |
|
1544 | 1558 | F G |/ |
|
1545 | 1559 | K | | -> K |
|
1546 | 1560 | | C D | |
|
1547 | 1561 | | |/ | |
|
1548 | 1562 | | B | ... |
|
1549 | 1563 | |/ |/ |
|
1550 | 1564 | A A |
|
1551 | 1565 | |
|
1552 | 1566 | Besides, adjust dest according to existing rebase information. For example, |
|
1553 | 1567 | |
|
1554 | 1568 | B C D B needs to be rebased on top of C, C needs to be rebased on top |
|
1555 | 1569 | \|/ of D. We will rebase C first. |
|
1556 | 1570 | A |
|
1557 | 1571 | |
|
1558 | 1572 | C' After rebasing C, when considering B's destination, use C' |
|
1559 | 1573 | | instead of the original C. |
|
1560 | 1574 | B D |
|
1561 | 1575 | \ / |
|
1562 | 1576 | A |
|
1563 | 1577 | """ |
|
1564 | 1578 | # pick already rebased revs with same dest from state as interesting source |
|
1565 | 1579 | dest = destmap[rev] |
|
1566 | 1580 | source = [ |
|
1567 | 1581 | s |
|
1568 | 1582 | for s, d in state.items() |
|
1569 | 1583 | if d > 0 and destmap[s] == dest and s not in skipped |
|
1570 | 1584 | ] |
|
1571 | 1585 | |
|
1572 | 1586 | result = [] |
|
1573 | 1587 | for prev in repo.changelog.parentrevs(rev): |
|
1574 | 1588 | adjusted = dest |
|
1575 | 1589 | if prev != nullrev: |
|
1576 | 1590 | candidate = repo.revs(b'max(%ld and (::%d))', source, prev).first() |
|
1577 | 1591 | if candidate is not None: |
|
1578 | 1592 | adjusted = state[candidate] |
|
1579 | 1593 | if adjusted == dest and dest in state: |
|
1580 | 1594 | adjusted = state[dest] |
|
1581 | 1595 | if adjusted == revtodo: |
|
1582 | 1596 | # sortsource should produce an order that makes this impossible |
|
1583 | 1597 | raise error.ProgrammingError( |
|
1584 | 1598 | b'rev %d should be rebased already at this time' % dest |
|
1585 | 1599 | ) |
|
1586 | 1600 | result.append(adjusted) |
|
1587 | 1601 | return result |
|
1588 | 1602 | |
|
1589 | 1603 | |
|
1590 | 1604 | def _checkobsrebase(repo, ui, rebaseobsrevs, rebaseobsskipped): |
|
1591 | 1605 | """ |
|
1592 | 1606 | Abort if rebase will create divergence or rebase is noop because of markers |
|
1593 | 1607 | |
|
1594 | 1608 | `rebaseobsrevs`: set of obsolete revision in source |
|
1595 | 1609 | `rebaseobsskipped`: set of revisions from source skipped because they have |
|
1596 | 1610 | successors in destination or no non-obsolete successor. |
|
1597 | 1611 | """ |
|
1598 | 1612 | # Obsolete node with successors not in dest leads to divergence |
|
1599 | 1613 | divergenceok = ui.configbool(b'experimental', b'evolution.allowdivergence') |
|
1600 | 1614 | divergencebasecandidates = rebaseobsrevs - rebaseobsskipped |
|
1601 | 1615 | |
|
1602 | 1616 | if divergencebasecandidates and not divergenceok: |
|
1603 | 1617 | divhashes = (bytes(repo[r]) for r in divergencebasecandidates) |
|
1604 | 1618 | msg = _(b"this rebase will cause divergences from: %s") |
|
1605 | 1619 | h = _( |
|
1606 | 1620 | b"to force the rebase please set " |
|
1607 | 1621 | b"experimental.evolution.allowdivergence=True" |
|
1608 | 1622 | ) |
|
1609 | 1623 | raise error.Abort(msg % (b",".join(divhashes),), hint=h) |
|
1610 | 1624 | |
|
1611 | 1625 | |
|
1612 | 1626 | def successorrevs(unfi, rev): |
|
1613 | 1627 | """yield revision numbers for successors of rev""" |
|
1614 | 1628 | assert unfi.filtername is None |
|
1615 | 1629 | get_rev = unfi.changelog.index.get_rev |
|
1616 | 1630 | for s in obsutil.allsuccessors(unfi.obsstore, [unfi[rev].node()]): |
|
1617 | 1631 | r = get_rev(s) |
|
1618 | 1632 | if r is not None: |
|
1619 | 1633 | yield r |
|
1620 | 1634 | |
|
1621 | 1635 | |
|
1622 | 1636 | def defineparents(repo, rev, destmap, state, skipped, obsskipped): |
|
1623 | 1637 | """Return new parents and optionally a merge base for rev being rebased |
|
1624 | 1638 | |
|
1625 | 1639 | The destination specified by "dest" cannot always be used directly because |
|
1626 | 1640 | previously rebase result could affect destination. For example, |
|
1627 | 1641 | |
|
1628 | 1642 | D E rebase -r C+D+E -d B |
|
1629 | 1643 | |/ C will be rebased to C' |
|
1630 | 1644 | B C D's new destination will be C' instead of B |
|
1631 | 1645 | |/ E's new destination will be C' instead of B |
|
1632 | 1646 | A |
|
1633 | 1647 | |
|
1634 | 1648 | The new parents of a merge is slightly more complicated. See the comment |
|
1635 | 1649 | block below. |
|
1636 | 1650 | """ |
|
1637 | 1651 | # use unfiltered changelog since successorrevs may return filtered nodes |
|
1638 | 1652 | assert repo.filtername is None |
|
1639 | 1653 | cl = repo.changelog |
|
1640 | 1654 | isancestor = cl.isancestorrev |
|
1641 | 1655 | |
|
1642 | 1656 | dest = destmap[rev] |
|
1643 | 1657 | oldps = repo.changelog.parentrevs(rev) # old parents |
|
1644 | 1658 | newps = [nullrev, nullrev] # new parents |
|
1645 | 1659 | dests = adjustdest(repo, rev, destmap, state, skipped) |
|
1646 | 1660 | bases = list(oldps) # merge base candidates, initially just old parents |
|
1647 | 1661 | |
|
1648 | 1662 | if all(r == nullrev for r in oldps[1:]): |
|
1649 | 1663 | # For non-merge changeset, just move p to adjusted dest as requested. |
|
1650 | 1664 | newps[0] = dests[0] |
|
1651 | 1665 | else: |
|
1652 | 1666 | # For merge changeset, if we move p to dests[i] unconditionally, both |
|
1653 | 1667 | # parents may change and the end result looks like "the merge loses a |
|
1654 | 1668 | # parent", which is a surprise. This is a limit because "--dest" only |
|
1655 | 1669 | # accepts one dest per src. |
|
1656 | 1670 | # |
|
1657 | 1671 | # Therefore, only move p with reasonable conditions (in this order): |
|
1658 | 1672 | # 1. use dest, if dest is a descendent of (p or one of p's successors) |
|
1659 | 1673 | # 2. use p's rebased result, if p is rebased (state[p] > 0) |
|
1660 | 1674 | # |
|
1661 | 1675 | # Comparing with adjustdest, the logic here does some additional work: |
|
1662 | 1676 | # 1. decide which parents will not be moved towards dest |
|
1663 | 1677 | # 2. if the above decision is "no", should a parent still be moved |
|
1664 | 1678 | # because it was rebased? |
|
1665 | 1679 | # |
|
1666 | 1680 | # For example: |
|
1667 | 1681 | # |
|
1668 | 1682 | # C # "rebase -r C -d D" is an error since none of the parents |
|
1669 | 1683 | # /| # can be moved. "rebase -r B+C -d D" will move C's parent |
|
1670 | 1684 | # A B D # B (using rule "2."), since B will be rebased. |
|
1671 | 1685 | # |
|
1672 | 1686 | # The loop tries to be not rely on the fact that a Mercurial node has |
|
1673 | 1687 | # at most 2 parents. |
|
1674 | 1688 | for i, p in enumerate(oldps): |
|
1675 | 1689 | np = p # new parent |
|
1676 | 1690 | if any(isancestor(x, dests[i]) for x in successorrevs(repo, p)): |
|
1677 | 1691 | np = dests[i] |
|
1678 | 1692 | elif p in state and state[p] > 0: |
|
1679 | 1693 | np = state[p] |
|
1680 | 1694 | |
|
1681 | 1695 | # If one parent becomes an ancestor of the other, drop the ancestor |
|
1682 | 1696 | for j, x in enumerate(newps[:i]): |
|
1683 | 1697 | if x == nullrev: |
|
1684 | 1698 | continue |
|
1685 | 1699 | if isancestor(np, x): # CASE-1 |
|
1686 | 1700 | np = nullrev |
|
1687 | 1701 | elif isancestor(x, np): # CASE-2 |
|
1688 | 1702 | newps[j] = np |
|
1689 | 1703 | np = nullrev |
|
1690 | 1704 | # New parents forming an ancestor relationship does not |
|
1691 | 1705 | # mean the old parents have a similar relationship. Do not |
|
1692 | 1706 | # set bases[x] to nullrev. |
|
1693 | 1707 | bases[j], bases[i] = bases[i], bases[j] |
|
1694 | 1708 | |
|
1695 | 1709 | newps[i] = np |
|
1696 | 1710 | |
|
1697 | 1711 | # "rebasenode" updates to new p1, and the old p1 will be used as merge |
|
1698 | 1712 | # base. If only p2 changes, merging using unchanged p1 as merge base is |
|
1699 | 1713 | # suboptimal. Therefore swap parents to make the merge sane. |
|
1700 | 1714 | if newps[1] != nullrev and oldps[0] == newps[0]: |
|
1701 | 1715 | assert len(newps) == 2 and len(oldps) == 2 |
|
1702 | 1716 | newps.reverse() |
|
1703 | 1717 | bases.reverse() |
|
1704 | 1718 | |
|
1705 | 1719 | # No parent change might be an error because we fail to make rev a |
|
1706 | 1720 | # descendent of requested dest. This can happen, for example: |
|
1707 | 1721 | # |
|
1708 | 1722 | # C # rebase -r C -d D |
|
1709 | 1723 | # /| # None of A and B will be changed to D and rebase fails. |
|
1710 | 1724 | # A B D |
|
1711 | 1725 | if set(newps) == set(oldps) and dest not in newps: |
|
1712 | 1726 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1713 | 1727 | _( |
|
1714 | 1728 | b'cannot rebase %d:%s without ' |
|
1715 | 1729 | b'moving at least one of its parents' |
|
1716 | 1730 | ) |
|
1717 | 1731 | % (rev, repo[rev]) |
|
1718 | 1732 | ) |
|
1719 | 1733 | |
|
1720 | 1734 | # Source should not be ancestor of dest. The check here guarantees it's |
|
1721 | 1735 | # impossible. With multi-dest, the initial check does not cover complex |
|
1722 | 1736 | # cases since we don't have abstractions to dry-run rebase cheaply. |
|
1723 | 1737 | if any(p != nullrev and isancestor(rev, p) for p in newps): |
|
1724 | 1738 | raise error.Abort(_(b'source is ancestor of destination')) |
|
1725 | 1739 | |
|
1726 | 1740 | # Check if the merge will contain unwanted changes. That may happen if |
|
1727 | 1741 | # there are multiple special (non-changelog ancestor) merge bases, which |
|
1728 | 1742 | # cannot be handled well by the 3-way merge algorithm. For example: |
|
1729 | 1743 | # |
|
1730 | 1744 | # F |
|
1731 | 1745 | # /| |
|
1732 | 1746 | # D E # "rebase -r D+E+F -d Z", when rebasing F, if "D" was chosen |
|
1733 | 1747 | # | | # as merge base, the difference between D and F will include |
|
1734 | 1748 | # B C # C, so the rebased F will contain C surprisingly. If "E" was |
|
1735 | 1749 | # |/ # chosen, the rebased F will contain B. |
|
1736 | 1750 | # A Z |
|
1737 | 1751 | # |
|
1738 | 1752 | # But our merge base candidates (D and E in above case) could still be |
|
1739 | 1753 | # better than the default (ancestor(F, Z) == null). Therefore still |
|
1740 | 1754 | # pick one (so choose p1 above). |
|
1741 | 1755 | if sum(1 for b in set(bases) if b != nullrev and b not in newps) > 1: |
|
1742 | 1756 | unwanted = [None, None] # unwanted[i]: unwanted revs if choose bases[i] |
|
1743 | 1757 | for i, base in enumerate(bases): |
|
1744 | 1758 | if base == nullrev or base in newps: |
|
1745 | 1759 | continue |
|
1746 | 1760 | # Revisions in the side (not chosen as merge base) branch that |
|
1747 | 1761 | # might contain "surprising" contents |
|
1748 | 1762 | other_bases = set(bases) - {base} |
|
1749 | 1763 | siderevs = list( |
|
1750 | 1764 | repo.revs(b'(%ld %% (%d+%d))', other_bases, base, dest) |
|
1751 | 1765 | ) |
|
1752 | 1766 | |
|
1753 | 1767 | # If those revisions are covered by rebaseset, the result is good. |
|
1754 | 1768 | # A merge in rebaseset would be considered to cover its ancestors. |
|
1755 | 1769 | if siderevs: |
|
1756 | 1770 | rebaseset = [ |
|
1757 | 1771 | r for r, d in state.items() if d > 0 and r not in obsskipped |
|
1758 | 1772 | ] |
|
1759 | 1773 | merges = [ |
|
1760 | 1774 | r for r in rebaseset if cl.parentrevs(r)[1] != nullrev |
|
1761 | 1775 | ] |
|
1762 | 1776 | unwanted[i] = list( |
|
1763 | 1777 | repo.revs( |
|
1764 | 1778 | b'%ld - (::%ld) - %ld', siderevs, merges, rebaseset |
|
1765 | 1779 | ) |
|
1766 | 1780 | ) |
|
1767 | 1781 | |
|
1768 | 1782 | if any(revs is not None for revs in unwanted): |
|
1769 | 1783 | # Choose a merge base that has a minimal number of unwanted revs. |
|
1770 | 1784 | l, i = min( |
|
1771 | 1785 | (len(revs), i) |
|
1772 | 1786 | for i, revs in enumerate(unwanted) |
|
1773 | 1787 | if revs is not None |
|
1774 | 1788 | ) |
|
1775 | 1789 | |
|
1776 | 1790 | # The merge will include unwanted revisions. Abort now. Revisit this if |
|
1777 | 1791 | # we have a more advanced merge algorithm that handles multiple bases. |
|
1778 | 1792 | if l > 0: |
|
1779 | 1793 | unwanteddesc = _(b' or ').join( |
|
1780 | 1794 | ( |
|
1781 | 1795 | b', '.join(b'%d:%s' % (r, repo[r]) for r in revs) |
|
1782 | 1796 | for revs in unwanted |
|
1783 | 1797 | if revs is not None |
|
1784 | 1798 | ) |
|
1785 | 1799 | ) |
|
1786 | 1800 | raise error.Abort( |
|
1787 | 1801 | _(b'rebasing %d:%s will include unwanted changes from %s') |
|
1788 | 1802 | % (rev, repo[rev], unwanteddesc) |
|
1789 | 1803 | ) |
|
1790 | 1804 | |
|
1791 | 1805 | # newps[0] should match merge base if possible. Currently, if newps[i] |
|
1792 | 1806 | # is nullrev, the only case is newps[i] and newps[j] (j < i), one is |
|
1793 | 1807 | # the other's ancestor. In that case, it's fine to not swap newps here. |
|
1794 | 1808 | # (see CASE-1 and CASE-2 above) |
|
1795 | 1809 | if i != 0: |
|
1796 | 1810 | if newps[i] != nullrev: |
|
1797 | 1811 | newps[0], newps[i] = newps[i], newps[0] |
|
1798 | 1812 | bases[0], bases[i] = bases[i], bases[0] |
|
1799 | 1813 | |
|
1800 | 1814 | # "rebasenode" updates to new p1, use the corresponding merge base. |
|
1801 | 1815 | base = bases[0] |
|
1802 | 1816 | |
|
1803 | 1817 | repo.ui.debug(b" future parents are %d and %d\n" % tuple(newps)) |
|
1804 | 1818 | |
|
1805 | 1819 | return newps[0], newps[1], base |
|
1806 | 1820 | |
|
1807 | 1821 | |
|
1808 | 1822 | def isagitpatch(repo, patchname): |
|
1809 | 1823 | """Return true if the given patch is in git format""" |
|
1810 | 1824 | mqpatch = os.path.join(repo.mq.path, patchname) |
|
1811 | 1825 | for line in patch.linereader(open(mqpatch, b'rb')): |
|
1812 | 1826 | if line.startswith(b'diff --git'): |
|
1813 | 1827 | return True |
|
1814 | 1828 | return False |
|
1815 | 1829 | |
|
1816 | 1830 | |
|
1817 | 1831 | def updatemq(repo, state, skipped, **opts): |
|
1818 | 1832 | """Update rebased mq patches - finalize and then import them""" |
|
1819 | 1833 | mqrebase = {} |
|
1820 | 1834 | mq = repo.mq |
|
1821 | 1835 | original_series = mq.fullseries[:] |
|
1822 | 1836 | skippedpatches = set() |
|
1823 | 1837 | |
|
1824 | 1838 | for p in mq.applied: |
|
1825 | 1839 | rev = repo[p.node].rev() |
|
1826 | 1840 | if rev in state: |
|
1827 | 1841 | repo.ui.debug( |
|
1828 | 1842 | b'revision %d is an mq patch (%s), finalize it.\n' |
|
1829 | 1843 | % (rev, p.name) |
|
1830 | 1844 | ) |
|
1831 | 1845 | mqrebase[rev] = (p.name, isagitpatch(repo, p.name)) |
|
1832 | 1846 | else: |
|
1833 | 1847 | # Applied but not rebased, not sure this should happen |
|
1834 | 1848 | skippedpatches.add(p.name) |
|
1835 | 1849 | |
|
1836 | 1850 | if mqrebase: |
|
1837 | 1851 | mq.finish(repo, mqrebase.keys()) |
|
1838 | 1852 | |
|
1839 | 1853 | # We must start import from the newest revision |
|
1840 | 1854 | for rev in sorted(mqrebase, reverse=True): |
|
1841 | 1855 | if rev not in skipped: |
|
1842 | 1856 | name, isgit = mqrebase[rev] |
|
1843 | 1857 | repo.ui.note( |
|
1844 | 1858 | _(b'updating mq patch %s to %d:%s\n') |
|
1845 | 1859 | % (name, state[rev], repo[state[rev]]) |
|
1846 | 1860 | ) |
|
1847 | 1861 | mq.qimport( |
|
1848 | 1862 | repo, |
|
1849 | 1863 | (), |
|
1850 | 1864 | patchname=name, |
|
1851 | 1865 | git=isgit, |
|
1852 | 1866 | rev=[b"%d" % state[rev]], |
|
1853 | 1867 | ) |
|
1854 | 1868 | else: |
|
1855 | 1869 | # Rebased and skipped |
|
1856 | 1870 | skippedpatches.add(mqrebase[rev][0]) |
|
1857 | 1871 | |
|
1858 | 1872 | # Patches were either applied and rebased and imported in |
|
1859 | 1873 | # order, applied and removed or unapplied. Discard the removed |
|
1860 | 1874 | # ones while preserving the original series order and guards. |
|
1861 | 1875 | newseries = [ |
|
1862 | 1876 | s |
|
1863 | 1877 | for s in original_series |
|
1864 | 1878 | if mq.guard_re.split(s, 1)[0] not in skippedpatches |
|
1865 | 1879 | ] |
|
1866 | 1880 | mq.fullseries[:] = newseries |
|
1867 | 1881 | mq.seriesdirty = True |
|
1868 | 1882 | mq.savedirty() |
|
1869 | 1883 | |
|
1870 | 1884 | |
|
1871 | 1885 | def storecollapsemsg(repo, collapsemsg): |
|
1872 | 1886 | """Store the collapse message to allow recovery""" |
|
1873 | 1887 | collapsemsg = collapsemsg or b'' |
|
1874 | 1888 | f = repo.vfs(b"last-message.txt", b"w") |
|
1875 | 1889 | f.write(b"%s\n" % collapsemsg) |
|
1876 | 1890 | f.close() |
|
1877 | 1891 | |
|
1878 | 1892 | |
|
1879 | 1893 | def clearcollapsemsg(repo): |
|
1880 | 1894 | """Remove collapse message file""" |
|
1881 | 1895 | repo.vfs.unlinkpath(b"last-message.txt", ignoremissing=True) |
|
1882 | 1896 | |
|
1883 | 1897 | |
|
1884 | 1898 | def restorecollapsemsg(repo, isabort): |
|
1885 | 1899 | """Restore previously stored collapse message""" |
|
1886 | 1900 | try: |
|
1887 | 1901 | f = repo.vfs(b"last-message.txt") |
|
1888 | 1902 | collapsemsg = f.readline().strip() |
|
1889 | 1903 | f.close() |
|
1890 | 1904 | except IOError as err: |
|
1891 | 1905 | if err.errno != errno.ENOENT: |
|
1892 | 1906 | raise |
|
1893 | 1907 | if isabort: |
|
1894 | 1908 | # Oh well, just abort like normal |
|
1895 | 1909 | collapsemsg = b'' |
|
1896 | 1910 | else: |
|
1897 | 1911 | raise error.Abort(_(b'missing .hg/last-message.txt for rebase')) |
|
1898 | 1912 | return collapsemsg |
|
1899 | 1913 | |
|
1900 | 1914 | |
|
1901 | 1915 | def clearstatus(repo): |
|
1902 | 1916 | """Remove the status files""" |
|
1903 | 1917 | # Make sure the active transaction won't write the state file |
|
1904 | 1918 | tr = repo.currenttransaction() |
|
1905 | 1919 | if tr: |
|
1906 | 1920 | tr.removefilegenerator(b'rebasestate') |
|
1907 | 1921 | repo.vfs.unlinkpath(b"rebasestate", ignoremissing=True) |
|
1908 | 1922 | |
|
1909 | 1923 | |
|
1910 | 1924 | def sortsource(destmap): |
|
1911 | 1925 | """yield source revisions in an order that we only rebase things once |
|
1912 | 1926 | |
|
1913 | 1927 | If source and destination overlaps, we should filter out revisions |
|
1914 | 1928 | depending on other revisions which hasn't been rebased yet. |
|
1915 | 1929 | |
|
1916 | 1930 | Yield a sorted list of revisions each time. |
|
1917 | 1931 | |
|
1918 | 1932 | For example, when rebasing A to B, B to C. This function yields [B], then |
|
1919 | 1933 | [A], indicating B needs to be rebased first. |
|
1920 | 1934 | |
|
1921 | 1935 | Raise if there is a cycle so the rebase is impossible. |
|
1922 | 1936 | """ |
|
1923 | 1937 | srcset = set(destmap) |
|
1924 | 1938 | while srcset: |
|
1925 | 1939 | srclist = sorted(srcset) |
|
1926 | 1940 | result = [] |
|
1927 | 1941 | for r in srclist: |
|
1928 | 1942 | if destmap[r] not in srcset: |
|
1929 | 1943 | result.append(r) |
|
1930 | 1944 | if not result: |
|
1931 | 1945 | raise error.Abort(_(b'source and destination form a cycle')) |
|
1932 | 1946 | srcset -= set(result) |
|
1933 | 1947 | yield result |
|
1934 | 1948 | |
|
1935 | 1949 | |
|
1936 | 1950 | def buildstate(repo, destmap, collapse): |
|
1937 | 1951 | '''Define which revisions are going to be rebased and where |
|
1938 | 1952 | |
|
1939 | 1953 | repo: repo |
|
1940 | 1954 | destmap: {srcrev: destrev} |
|
1941 | 1955 | ''' |
|
1942 | 1956 | rebaseset = destmap.keys() |
|
1943 | 1957 | originalwd = repo[b'.'].rev() |
|
1944 | 1958 | |
|
1945 | 1959 | # This check isn't strictly necessary, since mq detects commits over an |
|
1946 | 1960 | # applied patch. But it prevents messing up the working directory when |
|
1947 | 1961 | # a partially completed rebase is blocked by mq. |
|
1948 | 1962 | if b'qtip' in repo.tags(): |
|
1949 | 1963 | mqapplied = {repo[s.node].rev() for s in repo.mq.applied} |
|
1950 | 1964 | if set(destmap.values()) & mqapplied: |
|
1951 | 1965 | raise error.Abort(_(b'cannot rebase onto an applied mq patch')) |
|
1952 | 1966 | |
|
1953 | 1967 | # Get "cycle" error early by exhausting the generator. |
|
1954 | 1968 | sortedsrc = list(sortsource(destmap)) # a list of sorted revs |
|
1955 | 1969 | if not sortedsrc: |
|
1956 | 1970 | raise error.Abort(_(b'no matching revisions')) |
|
1957 | 1971 | |
|
1958 | 1972 | # Only check the first batch of revisions to rebase not depending on other |
|
1959 | 1973 | # rebaseset. This means "source is ancestor of destination" for the second |
|
1960 | 1974 | # (and following) batches of revisions are not checked here. We rely on |
|
1961 | 1975 | # "defineparents" to do that check. |
|
1962 | 1976 | roots = list(repo.set(b'roots(%ld)', sortedsrc[0])) |
|
1963 | 1977 | if not roots: |
|
1964 | 1978 | raise error.Abort(_(b'no matching revisions')) |
|
1965 | 1979 | |
|
1966 | 1980 | def revof(r): |
|
1967 | 1981 | return r.rev() |
|
1968 | 1982 | |
|
1969 | 1983 | roots = sorted(roots, key=revof) |
|
1970 | 1984 | state = dict.fromkeys(rebaseset, revtodo) |
|
1971 | 1985 | emptyrebase = len(sortedsrc) == 1 |
|
1972 | 1986 | for root in roots: |
|
1973 | 1987 | dest = repo[destmap[root.rev()]] |
|
1974 | 1988 | commonbase = root.ancestor(dest) |
|
1975 | 1989 | if commonbase == root: |
|
1976 | 1990 | raise error.Abort(_(b'source is ancestor of destination')) |
|
1977 | 1991 | if commonbase == dest: |
|
1978 | 1992 | wctx = repo[None] |
|
1979 | 1993 | if dest == wctx.p1(): |
|
1980 | 1994 | # when rebasing to '.', it will use the current wd branch name |
|
1981 | 1995 | samebranch = root.branch() == wctx.branch() |
|
1982 | 1996 | else: |
|
1983 | 1997 | samebranch = root.branch() == dest.branch() |
|
1984 | 1998 | if not collapse and samebranch and dest in root.parents(): |
|
1985 | 1999 | # mark the revision as done by setting its new revision |
|
1986 | 2000 | # equal to its old (current) revisions |
|
1987 | 2001 | state[root.rev()] = root.rev() |
|
1988 | 2002 | repo.ui.debug(b'source is a child of destination\n') |
|
1989 | 2003 | continue |
|
1990 | 2004 | |
|
1991 | 2005 | emptyrebase = False |
|
1992 | 2006 | repo.ui.debug(b'rebase onto %s starting from %s\n' % (dest, root)) |
|
1993 | 2007 | if emptyrebase: |
|
1994 | 2008 | return None |
|
1995 | 2009 | for rev in sorted(state): |
|
1996 | 2010 | parents = [p for p in repo.changelog.parentrevs(rev) if p != nullrev] |
|
1997 | 2011 | # if all parents of this revision are done, then so is this revision |
|
1998 | 2012 | if parents and all((state.get(p) == p for p in parents)): |
|
1999 | 2013 | state[rev] = rev |
|
2000 | 2014 | return originalwd, destmap, state |
|
2001 | 2015 | |
|
2002 | 2016 | |
|
2003 | 2017 | def clearrebased( |
|
2004 | 2018 | ui, |
|
2005 | 2019 | repo, |
|
2006 | 2020 | destmap, |
|
2007 | 2021 | state, |
|
2008 | 2022 | skipped, |
|
2009 | 2023 | collapsedas=None, |
|
2010 | 2024 | keepf=False, |
|
2011 | 2025 | fm=None, |
|
2012 | 2026 | backup=True, |
|
2013 | 2027 | ): |
|
2014 | 2028 | """dispose of rebased revision at the end of the rebase |
|
2015 | 2029 | |
|
2016 | 2030 | If `collapsedas` is not None, the rebase was a collapse whose result if the |
|
2017 | 2031 | `collapsedas` node. |
|
2018 | 2032 | |
|
2019 | 2033 | If `keepf` is not True, the rebase has --keep set and no nodes should be |
|
2020 | 2034 | removed (but bookmarks still need to be moved). |
|
2021 | 2035 | |
|
2022 | 2036 | If `backup` is False, no backup will be stored when stripping rebased |
|
2023 | 2037 | revisions. |
|
2024 | 2038 | """ |
|
2025 | 2039 | tonode = repo.changelog.node |
|
2026 | 2040 | replacements = {} |
|
2027 | 2041 | moves = {} |
|
2028 | 2042 | stripcleanup = not obsolete.isenabled(repo, obsolete.createmarkersopt) |
|
2029 | 2043 | |
|
2030 | 2044 | collapsednodes = [] |
|
2031 | 2045 | for rev, newrev in sorted(state.items()): |
|
2032 | 2046 | if newrev >= 0 and newrev != rev: |
|
2033 | 2047 | oldnode = tonode(rev) |
|
2034 | 2048 | newnode = collapsedas or tonode(newrev) |
|
2035 | 2049 | moves[oldnode] = newnode |
|
2036 | 2050 | succs = None |
|
2037 | 2051 | if rev in skipped: |
|
2038 | 2052 | if stripcleanup or not repo[rev].obsolete(): |
|
2039 | 2053 | succs = () |
|
2040 | 2054 | elif collapsedas: |
|
2041 | 2055 | collapsednodes.append(oldnode) |
|
2042 | 2056 | else: |
|
2043 | 2057 | succs = (newnode,) |
|
2044 | 2058 | if succs is not None: |
|
2045 | 2059 | replacements[(oldnode,)] = succs |
|
2046 | 2060 | if collapsednodes: |
|
2047 | 2061 | replacements[tuple(collapsednodes)] = (collapsedas,) |
|
2048 | 2062 | if fm: |
|
2049 | 2063 | hf = fm.hexfunc |
|
2050 | 2064 | fl = fm.formatlist |
|
2051 | 2065 | fd = fm.formatdict |
|
2052 | 2066 | changes = {} |
|
2053 | 2067 | for oldns, newn in pycompat.iteritems(replacements): |
|
2054 | 2068 | for oldn in oldns: |
|
2055 | 2069 | changes[hf(oldn)] = fl([hf(n) for n in newn], name=b'node') |
|
2056 | 2070 | nodechanges = fd(changes, key=b"oldnode", value=b"newnodes") |
|
2057 | 2071 | fm.data(nodechanges=nodechanges) |
|
2058 | 2072 | if keepf: |
|
2059 | 2073 | replacements = {} |
|
2060 | 2074 | scmutil.cleanupnodes(repo, replacements, b'rebase', moves, backup=backup) |
|
2061 | 2075 | |
|
2062 | 2076 | |
|
2063 | 2077 | def pullrebase(orig, ui, repo, *args, **opts): |
|
2064 | 2078 | """Call rebase after pull if the latter has been invoked with --rebase""" |
|
2065 | 2079 | if opts.get('rebase'): |
|
2066 | 2080 | if ui.configbool(b'commands', b'rebase.requiredest'): |
|
2067 | 2081 | msg = _(b'rebase destination required by configuration') |
|
2068 | 2082 | hint = _(b'use hg pull followed by hg rebase -d DEST') |
|
2069 | 2083 | raise error.Abort(msg, hint=hint) |
|
2070 | 2084 | |
|
2071 | 2085 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
2072 | 2086 | if opts.get('update'): |
|
2073 | 2087 | del opts['update'] |
|
2074 | 2088 | ui.debug( |
|
2075 | 2089 | b'--update and --rebase are not compatible, ignoring ' |
|
2076 | 2090 | b'the update flag\n' |
|
2077 | 2091 | ) |
|
2078 | 2092 | |
|
2079 | 2093 | cmdutil.checkunfinished(repo, skipmerge=True) |
|
2080 | 2094 | cmdutil.bailifchanged( |
|
2081 | 2095 | repo, |
|
2082 | 2096 | hint=_( |
|
2083 | 2097 | b'cannot pull with rebase: ' |
|
2084 | 2098 | b'please commit or shelve your changes first' |
|
2085 | 2099 | ), |
|
2086 | 2100 | ) |
|
2087 | 2101 | |
|
2088 | 2102 | revsprepull = len(repo) |
|
2089 | 2103 | origpostincoming = commands.postincoming |
|
2090 | 2104 | |
|
2091 | 2105 | def _dummy(*args, **kwargs): |
|
2092 | 2106 | pass |
|
2093 | 2107 | |
|
2094 | 2108 | commands.postincoming = _dummy |
|
2095 | 2109 | try: |
|
2096 | 2110 | ret = orig(ui, repo, *args, **opts) |
|
2097 | 2111 | finally: |
|
2098 | 2112 | commands.postincoming = origpostincoming |
|
2099 | 2113 | revspostpull = len(repo) |
|
2100 | 2114 | if revspostpull > revsprepull: |
|
2101 | 2115 | # --rev option from pull conflict with rebase own --rev |
|
2102 | 2116 | # dropping it |
|
2103 | 2117 | if 'rev' in opts: |
|
2104 | 2118 | del opts['rev'] |
|
2105 | 2119 | # positional argument from pull conflicts with rebase's own |
|
2106 | 2120 | # --source. |
|
2107 | 2121 | if 'source' in opts: |
|
2108 | 2122 | del opts['source'] |
|
2109 | 2123 | # revsprepull is the len of the repo, not revnum of tip. |
|
2110 | 2124 | destspace = list(repo.changelog.revs(start=revsprepull)) |
|
2111 | 2125 | opts['_destspace'] = destspace |
|
2112 | 2126 | try: |
|
2113 | 2127 | rebase(ui, repo, **opts) |
|
2114 | 2128 | except error.NoMergeDestAbort: |
|
2115 | 2129 | # we can maybe update instead |
|
2116 | 2130 | rev, _a, _b = destutil.destupdate(repo) |
|
2117 | 2131 | if rev == repo[b'.'].rev(): |
|
2118 | 2132 | ui.status(_(b'nothing to rebase\n')) |
|
2119 | 2133 | else: |
|
2120 | 2134 | ui.status(_(b'nothing to rebase - updating instead\n')) |
|
2121 | 2135 | # not passing argument to get the bare update behavior |
|
2122 | 2136 | # with warning and trumpets |
|
2123 | 2137 | commands.update(ui, repo) |
|
2124 | 2138 | else: |
|
2125 | 2139 | if opts.get('tool'): |
|
2126 | 2140 | raise error.Abort(_(b'--tool can only be used with --rebase')) |
|
2127 | 2141 | ret = orig(ui, repo, *args, **opts) |
|
2128 | 2142 | |
|
2129 | 2143 | return ret |
|
2130 | 2144 | |
|
2131 | 2145 | |
|
2132 | 2146 | def _filterobsoleterevs(repo, revs): |
|
2133 | 2147 | """returns a set of the obsolete revisions in revs""" |
|
2134 | 2148 | return {r for r in revs if repo[r].obsolete()} |
|
2135 | 2149 | |
|
2136 | 2150 | |
|
2137 | 2151 | def _computeobsoletenotrebased(repo, rebaseobsrevs, destmap): |
|
2138 | 2152 | """Return (obsoletenotrebased, obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination). |
|
2139 | 2153 | |
|
2140 | 2154 | `obsoletenotrebased` is a mapping mapping obsolete => successor for all |
|
2141 | 2155 | obsolete nodes to be rebased given in `rebaseobsrevs`. |
|
2142 | 2156 | |
|
2143 | 2157 | `obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination` is a set with obsolete revisions |
|
2144 | 2158 | without a successor in destination. |
|
2145 | 2159 | |
|
2146 | 2160 | `obsoleteextinctsuccessors` is a set of obsolete revisions with only |
|
2147 | 2161 | obsolete successors. |
|
2148 | 2162 | """ |
|
2149 | 2163 | obsoletenotrebased = {} |
|
2150 | 2164 | obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination = set() |
|
2151 | 2165 | obsoleteextinctsuccessors = set() |
|
2152 | 2166 | |
|
2153 | 2167 | assert repo.filtername is None |
|
2154 | 2168 | cl = repo.changelog |
|
2155 | 2169 | get_rev = cl.index.get_rev |
|
2156 | 2170 | extinctrevs = set(repo.revs(b'extinct()')) |
|
2157 | 2171 | for srcrev in rebaseobsrevs: |
|
2158 | 2172 | srcnode = cl.node(srcrev) |
|
2159 | 2173 | # XXX: more advanced APIs are required to handle split correctly |
|
2160 | 2174 | successors = set(obsutil.allsuccessors(repo.obsstore, [srcnode])) |
|
2161 | 2175 | # obsutil.allsuccessors includes node itself |
|
2162 | 2176 | successors.remove(srcnode) |
|
2163 | 2177 | succrevs = {get_rev(s) for s in successors} |
|
2164 | 2178 | succrevs.discard(None) |
|
2165 | 2179 | if succrevs.issubset(extinctrevs): |
|
2166 | 2180 | # all successors are extinct |
|
2167 | 2181 | obsoleteextinctsuccessors.add(srcrev) |
|
2168 | 2182 | if not successors: |
|
2169 | 2183 | # no successor |
|
2170 | 2184 | obsoletenotrebased[srcrev] = None |
|
2171 | 2185 | else: |
|
2172 | 2186 | dstrev = destmap[srcrev] |
|
2173 | 2187 | for succrev in succrevs: |
|
2174 | 2188 | if cl.isancestorrev(succrev, dstrev): |
|
2175 | 2189 | obsoletenotrebased[srcrev] = succrev |
|
2176 | 2190 | break |
|
2177 | 2191 | else: |
|
2178 | 2192 | # If 'srcrev' has a successor in rebase set but none in |
|
2179 | 2193 | # destination (which would be catched above), we shall skip it |
|
2180 | 2194 | # and its descendants to avoid divergence. |
|
2181 | 2195 | if srcrev in extinctrevs or any(s in destmap for s in succrevs): |
|
2182 | 2196 | obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination.add(srcrev) |
|
2183 | 2197 | |
|
2184 | 2198 | return ( |
|
2185 | 2199 | obsoletenotrebased, |
|
2186 | 2200 | obsoletewithoutsuccessorindestination, |
|
2187 | 2201 | obsoleteextinctsuccessors, |
|
2188 | 2202 | ) |
|
2189 | 2203 | |
|
2190 | 2204 | |
|
2191 | 2205 | def abortrebase(ui, repo): |
|
2192 | 2206 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
2193 | 2207 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui) |
|
2194 | 2208 | rbsrt._prepareabortorcontinue(isabort=True) |
|
2195 | 2209 | |
|
2196 | 2210 | |
|
2197 | 2211 | def continuerebase(ui, repo): |
|
2198 | 2212 | with repo.wlock(), repo.lock(): |
|
2199 | 2213 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui) |
|
2200 | 2214 | ms = mergestatemod.mergestate.read(repo) |
|
2201 | 2215 | mergeutil.checkunresolved(ms) |
|
2202 | 2216 | retcode = rbsrt._prepareabortorcontinue(isabort=False) |
|
2203 | 2217 | if retcode is not None: |
|
2204 | 2218 | return retcode |
|
2205 | 2219 | rbsrt._performrebase(None) |
|
2206 | 2220 | rbsrt._finishrebase() |
|
2207 | 2221 | |
|
2208 | 2222 | |
|
2209 | 2223 | def summaryhook(ui, repo): |
|
2210 | 2224 | if not repo.vfs.exists(b'rebasestate'): |
|
2211 | 2225 | return |
|
2212 | 2226 | try: |
|
2213 | 2227 | rbsrt = rebaseruntime(repo, ui, {}) |
|
2214 | 2228 | rbsrt.restorestatus() |
|
2215 | 2229 | state = rbsrt.state |
|
2216 | 2230 | except error.RepoLookupError: |
|
2217 | 2231 | # i18n: column positioning for "hg summary" |
|
2218 | 2232 | msg = _(b'rebase: (use "hg rebase --abort" to clear broken state)\n') |
|
2219 | 2233 | ui.write(msg) |
|
2220 | 2234 | return |
|
2221 | 2235 | numrebased = len([i for i in pycompat.itervalues(state) if i >= 0]) |
|
2222 | 2236 | # i18n: column positioning for "hg summary" |
|
2223 | 2237 | ui.write( |
|
2224 | 2238 | _(b'rebase: %s, %s (rebase --continue)\n') |
|
2225 | 2239 | % ( |
|
2226 | 2240 | ui.label(_(b'%d rebased'), b'rebase.rebased') % numrebased, |
|
2227 | 2241 | ui.label(_(b'%d remaining'), b'rebase.remaining') |
|
2228 | 2242 | % (len(state) - numrebased), |
|
2229 | 2243 | ) |
|
2230 | 2244 | ) |
|
2231 | 2245 | |
|
2232 | 2246 | |
|
2233 | 2247 | def uisetup(ui): |
|
2234 | 2248 | # Replace pull with a decorator to provide --rebase option |
|
2235 | 2249 | entry = extensions.wrapcommand(commands.table, b'pull', pullrebase) |
|
2236 | 2250 | entry[1].append( |
|
2237 | 2251 | (b'', b'rebase', None, _(b"rebase working directory to branch head")) |
|
2238 | 2252 | ) |
|
2239 | 2253 | entry[1].append((b't', b'tool', b'', _(b"specify merge tool for rebase"))) |
|
2240 | 2254 | cmdutil.summaryhooks.add(b'rebase', summaryhook) |
|
2241 | 2255 | statemod.addunfinished( |
|
2242 | 2256 | b'rebase', |
|
2243 | 2257 | fname=b'rebasestate', |
|
2244 | 2258 | stopflag=True, |
|
2245 | 2259 | continueflag=True, |
|
2246 | 2260 | abortfunc=abortrebase, |
|
2247 | 2261 | continuefunc=continuerebase, |
|
2248 | 2262 | ) |
@@ -1,2906 +1,2907 b'' | |||
|
1 | 1 | The Mercurial system uses a set of configuration files to control |
|
2 | 2 | aspects of its behavior. |
|
3 | 3 | |
|
4 | 4 | Troubleshooting |
|
5 | 5 | =============== |
|
6 | 6 | |
|
7 | 7 | If you're having problems with your configuration, |
|
8 | 8 | :hg:`config --debug` can help you understand what is introducing |
|
9 | 9 | a setting into your environment. |
|
10 | 10 | |
|
11 | 11 | See :hg:`help config.syntax` and :hg:`help config.files` |
|
12 | 12 | for information about how and where to override things. |
|
13 | 13 | |
|
14 | 14 | Structure |
|
15 | 15 | ========= |
|
16 | 16 | |
|
17 | 17 | The configuration files use a simple ini-file format. A configuration |
|
18 | 18 | file consists of sections, led by a ``[section]`` header and followed |
|
19 | 19 | by ``name = value`` entries:: |
|
20 | 20 | |
|
21 | 21 | [ui] |
|
22 | 22 | username = Firstname Lastname <firstname.lastname@example.net> |
|
23 | 23 | verbose = True |
|
24 | 24 | |
|
25 | 25 | The above entries will be referred to as ``ui.username`` and |
|
26 | 26 | ``ui.verbose``, respectively. See :hg:`help config.syntax`. |
|
27 | 27 | |
|
28 | 28 | Files |
|
29 | 29 | ===== |
|
30 | 30 | |
|
31 | 31 | Mercurial reads configuration data from several files, if they exist. |
|
32 | 32 | These files do not exist by default and you will have to create the |
|
33 | 33 | appropriate configuration files yourself: |
|
34 | 34 | |
|
35 | 35 | Local configuration is put into the per-repository ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` file. |
|
36 | 36 | |
|
37 | 37 | Global configuration like the username setting is typically put into: |
|
38 | 38 | |
|
39 | 39 | .. container:: windows |
|
40 | 40 | |
|
41 | 41 | - ``%USERPROFILE%\mercurial.ini`` (on Windows) |
|
42 | 42 | |
|
43 | 43 | .. container:: unix.plan9 |
|
44 | 44 | |
|
45 | 45 | - ``$HOME/.hgrc`` (on Unix, Plan9) |
|
46 | 46 | |
|
47 | 47 | The names of these files depend on the system on which Mercurial is |
|
48 | 48 | installed. ``*.rc`` files from a single directory are read in |
|
49 | 49 | alphabetical order, later ones overriding earlier ones. Where multiple |
|
50 | 50 | paths are given below, settings from earlier paths override later |
|
51 | 51 | ones. |
|
52 | 52 | |
|
53 | 53 | .. container:: verbose.unix |
|
54 | 54 | |
|
55 | 55 | On Unix, the following files are consulted: |
|
56 | 56 | |
|
57 | 57 | - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository) |
|
58 | 58 | - ``$HOME/.hgrc`` (per-user) |
|
59 | 59 | - ``${XDG_CONFIG_HOME:-$HOME/.config}/hg/hgrc`` (per-user) |
|
60 | 60 | - ``<install-root>/etc/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-installation) |
|
61 | 61 | - ``<install-root>/etc/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-installation) |
|
62 | 62 | - ``/etc/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-system) |
|
63 | 63 | - ``/etc/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-system) |
|
64 | 64 | - ``<internal>/*.rc`` (defaults) |
|
65 | 65 | |
|
66 | 66 | .. container:: verbose.windows |
|
67 | 67 | |
|
68 | 68 | On Windows, the following files are consulted: |
|
69 | 69 | |
|
70 | 70 | - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository) |
|
71 | 71 | - ``%USERPROFILE%\.hgrc`` (per-user) |
|
72 | 72 | - ``%USERPROFILE%\Mercurial.ini`` (per-user) |
|
73 | 73 | - ``%HOME%\.hgrc`` (per-user) |
|
74 | 74 | - ``%HOME%\Mercurial.ini`` (per-user) |
|
75 | 75 | - ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Mercurial`` (per-system) |
|
76 | 76 | - ``<install-dir>\hgrc.d\*.rc`` (per-installation) |
|
77 | 77 | - ``<install-dir>\Mercurial.ini`` (per-installation) |
|
78 | 78 | - ``%PROGRAMDATA%\Mercurial\hgrc`` (per-system) |
|
79 | 79 | - ``%PROGRAMDATA%\Mercurial\Mercurial.ini`` (per-system) |
|
80 | 80 | - ``%PROGRAMDATA%\Mercurial\hgrc.d\*.rc`` (per-system) |
|
81 | 81 | - ``<internal>/*.rc`` (defaults) |
|
82 | 82 | |
|
83 | 83 | .. note:: |
|
84 | 84 | |
|
85 | 85 | The registry key ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Mercurial`` |
|
86 | 86 | is used when running 32-bit Python on 64-bit Windows. |
|
87 | 87 | |
|
88 | 88 | .. container:: verbose.plan9 |
|
89 | 89 | |
|
90 | 90 | On Plan9, the following files are consulted: |
|
91 | 91 | |
|
92 | 92 | - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository) |
|
93 | 93 | - ``$home/lib/hgrc`` (per-user) |
|
94 | 94 | - ``<install-root>/lib/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-installation) |
|
95 | 95 | - ``<install-root>/lib/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-installation) |
|
96 | 96 | - ``/lib/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-system) |
|
97 | 97 | - ``/lib/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-system) |
|
98 | 98 | - ``<internal>/*.rc`` (defaults) |
|
99 | 99 | |
|
100 | 100 | Per-repository configuration options only apply in a |
|
101 | 101 | particular repository. This file is not version-controlled, and |
|
102 | 102 | will not get transferred during a "clone" operation. Options in |
|
103 | 103 | this file override options in all other configuration files. |
|
104 | 104 | |
|
105 | 105 | .. container:: unix.plan9 |
|
106 | 106 | |
|
107 | 107 | On Plan 9 and Unix, most of this file will be ignored if it doesn't |
|
108 | 108 | belong to a trusted user or to a trusted group. See |
|
109 | 109 | :hg:`help config.trusted` for more details. |
|
110 | 110 | |
|
111 | 111 | Per-user configuration file(s) are for the user running Mercurial. Options |
|
112 | 112 | in these files apply to all Mercurial commands executed by this user in any |
|
113 | 113 | directory. Options in these files override per-system and per-installation |
|
114 | 114 | options. |
|
115 | 115 | |
|
116 | 116 | Per-installation configuration files are searched for in the |
|
117 | 117 | directory where Mercurial is installed. ``<install-root>`` is the |
|
118 | 118 | parent directory of the **hg** executable (or symlink) being run. |
|
119 | 119 | |
|
120 | 120 | .. container:: unix.plan9 |
|
121 | 121 | |
|
122 | 122 | For example, if installed in ``/shared/tools/bin/hg``, Mercurial |
|
123 | 123 | will look in ``/shared/tools/etc/mercurial/hgrc``. Options in these |
|
124 | 124 | files apply to all Mercurial commands executed by any user in any |
|
125 | 125 | directory. |
|
126 | 126 | |
|
127 | 127 | Per-installation configuration files are for the system on |
|
128 | 128 | which Mercurial is running. Options in these files apply to all |
|
129 | 129 | Mercurial commands executed by any user in any directory. Registry |
|
130 | 130 | keys contain PATH-like strings, every part of which must reference |
|
131 | 131 | a ``Mercurial.ini`` file or be a directory where ``*.rc`` files will |
|
132 | 132 | be read. Mercurial checks each of these locations in the specified |
|
133 | 133 | order until one or more configuration files are detected. |
|
134 | 134 | |
|
135 | 135 | Per-system configuration files are for the system on which Mercurial |
|
136 | 136 | is running. Options in these files apply to all Mercurial commands |
|
137 | 137 | executed by any user in any directory. Options in these files |
|
138 | 138 | override per-installation options. |
|
139 | 139 | |
|
140 | 140 | Mercurial comes with some default configuration. The default configuration |
|
141 | 141 | files are installed with Mercurial and will be overwritten on upgrades. Default |
|
142 | 142 | configuration files should never be edited by users or administrators but can |
|
143 | 143 | be overridden in other configuration files. So far the directory only contains |
|
144 | 144 | merge tool configuration but packagers can also put other default configuration |
|
145 | 145 | there. |
|
146 | 146 | |
|
147 | 147 | Syntax |
|
148 | 148 | ====== |
|
149 | 149 | |
|
150 | 150 | A configuration file consists of sections, led by a ``[section]`` header |
|
151 | 151 | and followed by ``name = value`` entries (sometimes called |
|
152 | 152 | ``configuration keys``):: |
|
153 | 153 | |
|
154 | 154 | [spam] |
|
155 | 155 | eggs=ham |
|
156 | 156 | green= |
|
157 | 157 | eggs |
|
158 | 158 | |
|
159 | 159 | Each line contains one entry. If the lines that follow are indented, |
|
160 | 160 | they are treated as continuations of that entry. Leading whitespace is |
|
161 | 161 | removed from values. Empty lines are skipped. Lines beginning with |
|
162 | 162 | ``#`` or ``;`` are ignored and may be used to provide comments. |
|
163 | 163 | |
|
164 | 164 | Configuration keys can be set multiple times, in which case Mercurial |
|
165 | 165 | will use the value that was configured last. As an example:: |
|
166 | 166 | |
|
167 | 167 | [spam] |
|
168 | 168 | eggs=large |
|
169 | 169 | ham=serrano |
|
170 | 170 | eggs=small |
|
171 | 171 | |
|
172 | 172 | This would set the configuration key named ``eggs`` to ``small``. |
|
173 | 173 | |
|
174 | 174 | It is also possible to define a section multiple times. A section can |
|
175 | 175 | be redefined on the same and/or on different configuration files. For |
|
176 | 176 | example:: |
|
177 | 177 | |
|
178 | 178 | [foo] |
|
179 | 179 | eggs=large |
|
180 | 180 | ham=serrano |
|
181 | 181 | eggs=small |
|
182 | 182 | |
|
183 | 183 | [bar] |
|
184 | 184 | eggs=ham |
|
185 | 185 | green= |
|
186 | 186 | eggs |
|
187 | 187 | |
|
188 | 188 | [foo] |
|
189 | 189 | ham=prosciutto |
|
190 | 190 | eggs=medium |
|
191 | 191 | bread=toasted |
|
192 | 192 | |
|
193 | 193 | This would set the ``eggs``, ``ham``, and ``bread`` configuration keys |
|
194 | 194 | of the ``foo`` section to ``medium``, ``prosciutto``, and ``toasted``, |
|
195 | 195 | respectively. As you can see there only thing that matters is the last |
|
196 | 196 | value that was set for each of the configuration keys. |
|
197 | 197 | |
|
198 | 198 | If a configuration key is set multiple times in different |
|
199 | 199 | configuration files the final value will depend on the order in which |
|
200 | 200 | the different configuration files are read, with settings from earlier |
|
201 | 201 | paths overriding later ones as described on the ``Files`` section |
|
202 | 202 | above. |
|
203 | 203 | |
|
204 | 204 | A line of the form ``%include file`` will include ``file`` into the |
|
205 | 205 | current configuration file. The inclusion is recursive, which means |
|
206 | 206 | that included files can include other files. Filenames are relative to |
|
207 | 207 | the configuration file in which the ``%include`` directive is found. |
|
208 | 208 | Environment variables and ``~user`` constructs are expanded in |
|
209 | 209 | ``file``. This lets you do something like:: |
|
210 | 210 | |
|
211 | 211 | %include ~/.hgrc.d/$HOST.rc |
|
212 | 212 | |
|
213 | 213 | to include a different configuration file on each computer you use. |
|
214 | 214 | |
|
215 | 215 | A line with ``%unset name`` will remove ``name`` from the current |
|
216 | 216 | section, if it has been set previously. |
|
217 | 217 | |
|
218 | 218 | The values are either free-form text strings, lists of text strings, |
|
219 | 219 | or Boolean values. Boolean values can be set to true using any of "1", |
|
220 | 220 | "yes", "true", or "on" and to false using "0", "no", "false", or "off" |
|
221 | 221 | (all case insensitive). |
|
222 | 222 | |
|
223 | 223 | List values are separated by whitespace or comma, except when values are |
|
224 | 224 | placed in double quotation marks:: |
|
225 | 225 | |
|
226 | 226 | allow_read = "John Doe, PhD", brian, betty |
|
227 | 227 | |
|
228 | 228 | Quotation marks can be escaped by prefixing them with a backslash. Only |
|
229 | 229 | quotation marks at the beginning of a word is counted as a quotation |
|
230 | 230 | (e.g., ``foo"bar baz`` is the list of ``foo"bar`` and ``baz``). |
|
231 | 231 | |
|
232 | 232 | Sections |
|
233 | 233 | ======== |
|
234 | 234 | |
|
235 | 235 | This section describes the different sections that may appear in a |
|
236 | 236 | Mercurial configuration file, the purpose of each section, its possible |
|
237 | 237 | keys, and their possible values. |
|
238 | 238 | |
|
239 | 239 | ``alias`` |
|
240 | 240 | --------- |
|
241 | 241 | |
|
242 | 242 | Defines command aliases. |
|
243 | 243 | |
|
244 | 244 | Aliases allow you to define your own commands in terms of other |
|
245 | 245 | commands (or aliases), optionally including arguments. Positional |
|
246 | 246 | arguments in the form of ``$1``, ``$2``, etc. in the alias definition |
|
247 | 247 | are expanded by Mercurial before execution. Positional arguments not |
|
248 | 248 | already used by ``$N`` in the definition are put at the end of the |
|
249 | 249 | command to be executed. |
|
250 | 250 | |
|
251 | 251 | Alias definitions consist of lines of the form:: |
|
252 | 252 | |
|
253 | 253 | <alias> = <command> [<argument>]... |
|
254 | 254 | |
|
255 | 255 | For example, this definition:: |
|
256 | 256 | |
|
257 | 257 | latest = log --limit 5 |
|
258 | 258 | |
|
259 | 259 | creates a new command ``latest`` that shows only the five most recent |
|
260 | 260 | changesets. You can define subsequent aliases using earlier ones:: |
|
261 | 261 | |
|
262 | 262 | stable5 = latest -b stable |
|
263 | 263 | |
|
264 | 264 | .. note:: |
|
265 | 265 | |
|
266 | 266 | It is possible to create aliases with the same names as |
|
267 | 267 | existing commands, which will then override the original |
|
268 | 268 | definitions. This is almost always a bad idea! |
|
269 | 269 | |
|
270 | 270 | An alias can start with an exclamation point (``!``) to make it a |
|
271 | 271 | shell alias. A shell alias is executed with the shell and will let you |
|
272 | 272 | run arbitrary commands. As an example, :: |
|
273 | 273 | |
|
274 | 274 | echo = !echo $@ |
|
275 | 275 | |
|
276 | 276 | will let you do ``hg echo foo`` to have ``foo`` printed in your |
|
277 | 277 | terminal. A better example might be:: |
|
278 | 278 | |
|
279 | 279 | purge = !$HG status --no-status --unknown -0 re: | xargs -0 rm -f |
|
280 | 280 | |
|
281 | 281 | which will make ``hg purge`` delete all unknown files in the |
|
282 | 282 | repository in the same manner as the purge extension. |
|
283 | 283 | |
|
284 | 284 | Positional arguments like ``$1``, ``$2``, etc. in the alias definition |
|
285 | 285 | expand to the command arguments. Unmatched arguments are |
|
286 | 286 | removed. ``$0`` expands to the alias name and ``$@`` expands to all |
|
287 | 287 | arguments separated by a space. ``"$@"`` (with quotes) expands to all |
|
288 | 288 | arguments quoted individually and separated by a space. These expansions |
|
289 | 289 | happen before the command is passed to the shell. |
|
290 | 290 | |
|
291 | 291 | Shell aliases are executed in an environment where ``$HG`` expands to |
|
292 | 292 | the path of the Mercurial that was used to execute the alias. This is |
|
293 | 293 | useful when you want to call further Mercurial commands in a shell |
|
294 | 294 | alias, as was done above for the purge alias. In addition, |
|
295 | 295 | ``$HG_ARGS`` expands to the arguments given to Mercurial. In the ``hg |
|
296 | 296 | echo foo`` call above, ``$HG_ARGS`` would expand to ``echo foo``. |
|
297 | 297 | |
|
298 | 298 | .. note:: |
|
299 | 299 | |
|
300 | 300 | Some global configuration options such as ``-R`` are |
|
301 | 301 | processed before shell aliases and will thus not be passed to |
|
302 | 302 | aliases. |
|
303 | 303 | |
|
304 | 304 | |
|
305 | 305 | ``annotate`` |
|
306 | 306 | ------------ |
|
307 | 307 | |
|
308 | 308 | Settings used when displaying file annotations. All values are |
|
309 | 309 | Booleans and default to False. See :hg:`help config.diff` for |
|
310 | 310 | related options for the diff command. |
|
311 | 311 | |
|
312 | 312 | ``ignorews`` |
|
313 | 313 | Ignore white space when comparing lines. |
|
314 | 314 | |
|
315 | 315 | ``ignorewseol`` |
|
316 | 316 | Ignore white space at the end of a line when comparing lines. |
|
317 | 317 | |
|
318 | 318 | ``ignorewsamount`` |
|
319 | 319 | Ignore changes in the amount of white space. |
|
320 | 320 | |
|
321 | 321 | ``ignoreblanklines`` |
|
322 | 322 | Ignore changes whose lines are all blank. |
|
323 | 323 | |
|
324 | 324 | |
|
325 | 325 | ``auth`` |
|
326 | 326 | -------- |
|
327 | 327 | |
|
328 | 328 | Authentication credentials and other authentication-like configuration |
|
329 | 329 | for HTTP connections. This section allows you to store usernames and |
|
330 | 330 | passwords for use when logging *into* HTTP servers. See |
|
331 | 331 | :hg:`help config.web` if you want to configure *who* can login to |
|
332 | 332 | your HTTP server. |
|
333 | 333 | |
|
334 | 334 | The following options apply to all hosts. |
|
335 | 335 | |
|
336 | 336 | ``cookiefile`` |
|
337 | 337 | Path to a file containing HTTP cookie lines. Cookies matching a |
|
338 | 338 | host will be sent automatically. |
|
339 | 339 | |
|
340 | 340 | The file format uses the Mozilla cookies.txt format, which defines cookies |
|
341 | 341 | on their own lines. Each line contains 7 fields delimited by the tab |
|
342 | 342 | character (domain, is_domain_cookie, path, is_secure, expires, name, |
|
343 | 343 | value). For more info, do an Internet search for "Netscape cookies.txt |
|
344 | 344 | format." |
|
345 | 345 | |
|
346 | 346 | Note: the cookies parser does not handle port numbers on domains. You |
|
347 | 347 | will need to remove ports from the domain for the cookie to be recognized. |
|
348 | 348 | This could result in a cookie being disclosed to an unwanted server. |
|
349 | 349 | |
|
350 | 350 | The cookies file is read-only. |
|
351 | 351 | |
|
352 | 352 | Other options in this section are grouped by name and have the following |
|
353 | 353 | format:: |
|
354 | 354 | |
|
355 | 355 | <name>.<argument> = <value> |
|
356 | 356 | |
|
357 | 357 | where ``<name>`` is used to group arguments into authentication |
|
358 | 358 | entries. Example:: |
|
359 | 359 | |
|
360 | 360 | foo.prefix = hg.intevation.de/mercurial |
|
361 | 361 | foo.username = foo |
|
362 | 362 | foo.password = bar |
|
363 | 363 | foo.schemes = http https |
|
364 | 364 | |
|
365 | 365 | bar.prefix = secure.example.org |
|
366 | 366 | bar.key = path/to/file.key |
|
367 | 367 | bar.cert = path/to/file.cert |
|
368 | 368 | bar.schemes = https |
|
369 | 369 | |
|
370 | 370 | Supported arguments: |
|
371 | 371 | |
|
372 | 372 | ``prefix`` |
|
373 | 373 | Either ``*`` or a URI prefix with or without the scheme part. |
|
374 | 374 | The authentication entry with the longest matching prefix is used |
|
375 | 375 | (where ``*`` matches everything and counts as a match of length |
|
376 | 376 | 1). If the prefix doesn't include a scheme, the match is performed |
|
377 | 377 | against the URI with its scheme stripped as well, and the schemes |
|
378 | 378 | argument, q.v., is then subsequently consulted. |
|
379 | 379 | |
|
380 | 380 | ``username`` |
|
381 | 381 | Optional. Username to authenticate with. If not given, and the |
|
382 | 382 | remote site requires basic or digest authentication, the user will |
|
383 | 383 | be prompted for it. Environment variables are expanded in the |
|
384 | 384 | username letting you do ``foo.username = $USER``. If the URI |
|
385 | 385 | includes a username, only ``[auth]`` entries with a matching |
|
386 | 386 | username or without a username will be considered. |
|
387 | 387 | |
|
388 | 388 | ``password`` |
|
389 | 389 | Optional. Password to authenticate with. If not given, and the |
|
390 | 390 | remote site requires basic or digest authentication, the user |
|
391 | 391 | will be prompted for it. |
|
392 | 392 | |
|
393 | 393 | ``key`` |
|
394 | 394 | Optional. PEM encoded client certificate key file. Environment |
|
395 | 395 | variables are expanded in the filename. |
|
396 | 396 | |
|
397 | 397 | ``cert`` |
|
398 | 398 | Optional. PEM encoded client certificate chain file. Environment |
|
399 | 399 | variables are expanded in the filename. |
|
400 | 400 | |
|
401 | 401 | ``schemes`` |
|
402 | 402 | Optional. Space separated list of URI schemes to use this |
|
403 | 403 | authentication entry with. Only used if the prefix doesn't include |
|
404 | 404 | a scheme. Supported schemes are http and https. They will match |
|
405 | 405 | static-http and static-https respectively, as well. |
|
406 | 406 | (default: https) |
|
407 | 407 | |
|
408 | 408 | If no suitable authentication entry is found, the user is prompted |
|
409 | 409 | for credentials as usual if required by the remote. |
|
410 | 410 | |
|
411 | 411 | ``cmdserver`` |
|
412 | 412 | ------------- |
|
413 | 413 | |
|
414 | 414 | Controls command server settings. (ADVANCED) |
|
415 | 415 | |
|
416 | 416 | ``message-encodings`` |
|
417 | 417 | List of encodings for the ``m`` (message) channel. The first encoding |
|
418 | 418 | supported by the server will be selected and advertised in the hello |
|
419 | 419 | message. This is useful only when ``ui.message-output`` is set to |
|
420 | 420 | ``channel``. Supported encodings are ``cbor``. |
|
421 | 421 | |
|
422 | 422 | ``shutdown-on-interrupt`` |
|
423 | 423 | If set to false, the server's main loop will continue running after |
|
424 | 424 | SIGINT received. ``runcommand`` requests can still be interrupted by |
|
425 | 425 | SIGINT. Close the write end of the pipe to shut down the server |
|
426 | 426 | process gracefully. |
|
427 | 427 | (default: True) |
|
428 | 428 | |
|
429 | 429 | ``color`` |
|
430 | 430 | --------- |
|
431 | 431 | |
|
432 | 432 | Configure the Mercurial color mode. For details about how to define your custom |
|
433 | 433 | effect and style see :hg:`help color`. |
|
434 | 434 | |
|
435 | 435 | ``mode`` |
|
436 | 436 | String: control the method used to output color. One of ``auto``, ``ansi``, |
|
437 | 437 | ``win32``, ``terminfo`` or ``debug``. In auto mode, Mercurial will |
|
438 | 438 | use ANSI mode by default (or win32 mode prior to Windows 10) if it detects a |
|
439 | 439 | terminal. Any invalid value will disable color. |
|
440 | 440 | |
|
441 | 441 | ``pagermode`` |
|
442 | 442 | String: optional override of ``color.mode`` used with pager. |
|
443 | 443 | |
|
444 | 444 | On some systems, terminfo mode may cause problems when using |
|
445 | 445 | color with ``less -R`` as a pager program. less with the -R option |
|
446 | 446 | will only display ECMA-48 color codes, and terminfo mode may sometimes |
|
447 | 447 | emit codes that less doesn't understand. You can work around this by |
|
448 | 448 | either using ansi mode (or auto mode), or by using less -r (which will |
|
449 | 449 | pass through all terminal control codes, not just color control |
|
450 | 450 | codes). |
|
451 | 451 | |
|
452 | 452 | On some systems (such as MSYS in Windows), the terminal may support |
|
453 | 453 | a different color mode than the pager program. |
|
454 | 454 | |
|
455 | 455 | ``commands`` |
|
456 | 456 | ------------ |
|
457 | 457 | |
|
458 | 458 | ``commit.post-status`` |
|
459 | 459 | Show status of files in the working directory after successful commit. |
|
460 | 460 | (default: False) |
|
461 | 461 | |
|
462 | 462 | ``merge.require-rev`` |
|
463 | 463 | Require that the revision to merge the current commit with be specified on |
|
464 | 464 | the command line. If this is enabled and a revision is not specified, the |
|
465 | 465 | command aborts. |
|
466 | 466 | (default: False) |
|
467 | 467 | |
|
468 | 468 | ``push.require-revs`` |
|
469 | 469 | Require revisions to push be specified using one or more mechanisms such as |
|
470 | 470 | specifying them positionally on the command line, using ``-r``, ``-b``, |
|
471 | 471 | and/or ``-B`` on the command line, or using ``paths.<path>:pushrev`` in the |
|
472 | 472 | configuration. If this is enabled and revisions are not specified, the |
|
473 | 473 | command aborts. |
|
474 | 474 | (default: False) |
|
475 | 475 | |
|
476 | 476 | ``resolve.confirm`` |
|
477 | 477 | Confirm before performing action if no filename is passed. |
|
478 | 478 | (default: False) |
|
479 | 479 | |
|
480 | 480 | ``resolve.explicit-re-merge`` |
|
481 | 481 | Require uses of ``hg resolve`` to specify which action it should perform, |
|
482 | 482 | instead of re-merging files by default. |
|
483 | 483 | (default: False) |
|
484 | 484 | |
|
485 | 485 | ``resolve.mark-check`` |
|
486 | 486 | Determines what level of checking :hg:`resolve --mark` will perform before |
|
487 | 487 | marking files as resolved. Valid values are ``none`, ``warn``, and |
|
488 | 488 | ``abort``. ``warn`` will output a warning listing the file(s) that still |
|
489 | 489 | have conflict markers in them, but will still mark everything resolved. |
|
490 | 490 | ``abort`` will output the same warning but will not mark things as resolved. |
|
491 | 491 | If --all is passed and this is set to ``abort``, only a warning will be |
|
492 | 492 | shown (an error will not be raised). |
|
493 | 493 | (default: ``none``) |
|
494 | 494 | |
|
495 | 495 | ``status.relative`` |
|
496 | 496 | Make paths in :hg:`status` output relative to the current directory. |
|
497 | 497 | (default: False) |
|
498 | 498 | |
|
499 | 499 | ``status.terse`` |
|
500 | 500 | Default value for the --terse flag, which condenses status output. |
|
501 | 501 | (default: empty) |
|
502 | 502 | |
|
503 | 503 | ``update.check`` |
|
504 | 504 | Determines what level of checking :hg:`update` will perform before moving |
|
505 | 505 | to a destination revision. Valid values are ``abort``, ``none``, |
|
506 | 506 | ``linear``, and ``noconflict``. ``abort`` always fails if the working |
|
507 | 507 | directory has uncommitted changes. ``none`` performs no checking, and may |
|
508 | 508 | result in a merge with uncommitted changes. ``linear`` allows any update |
|
509 | 509 | as long as it follows a straight line in the revision history, and may |
|
510 | 510 | trigger a merge with uncommitted changes. ``noconflict`` will allow any |
|
511 | 511 | update which would not trigger a merge with uncommitted changes, if any |
|
512 | 512 | are present. |
|
513 | 513 | (default: ``linear``) |
|
514 | 514 | |
|
515 | 515 | ``update.requiredest`` |
|
516 | 516 | Require that the user pass a destination when running :hg:`update`. |
|
517 | 517 | For example, :hg:`update .::` will be allowed, but a plain :hg:`update` |
|
518 | 518 | will be disallowed. |
|
519 | 519 | (default: False) |
|
520 | 520 | |
|
521 | 521 | ``committemplate`` |
|
522 | 522 | ------------------ |
|
523 | 523 | |
|
524 | 524 | ``changeset`` |
|
525 | 525 | String: configuration in this section is used as the template to |
|
526 | 526 | customize the text shown in the editor when committing. |
|
527 | 527 | |
|
528 | 528 | In addition to pre-defined template keywords, commit log specific one |
|
529 | 529 | below can be used for customization: |
|
530 | 530 | |
|
531 | 531 | ``extramsg`` |
|
532 | 532 | String: Extra message (typically 'Leave message empty to abort |
|
533 | 533 | commit.'). This may be changed by some commands or extensions. |
|
534 | 534 | |
|
535 | 535 | For example, the template configuration below shows as same text as |
|
536 | 536 | one shown by default:: |
|
537 | 537 | |
|
538 | 538 | [committemplate] |
|
539 | 539 | changeset = {desc}\n\n |
|
540 | 540 | HG: Enter commit message. Lines beginning with 'HG:' are removed. |
|
541 | 541 | HG: {extramsg} |
|
542 | 542 | HG: -- |
|
543 | 543 | HG: user: {author}\n{ifeq(p2rev, "-1", "", |
|
544 | 544 | "HG: branch merge\n") |
|
545 | 545 | }HG: branch '{branch}'\n{if(activebookmark, |
|
546 | 546 | "HG: bookmark '{activebookmark}'\n") }{subrepos % |
|
547 | 547 | "HG: subrepo {subrepo}\n" }{file_adds % |
|
548 | 548 | "HG: added {file}\n" }{file_mods % |
|
549 | 549 | "HG: changed {file}\n" }{file_dels % |
|
550 | 550 | "HG: removed {file}\n" }{if(files, "", |
|
551 | 551 | "HG: no files changed\n")} |
|
552 | 552 | |
|
553 | 553 | ``diff()`` |
|
554 | 554 | String: show the diff (see :hg:`help templates` for detail) |
|
555 | 555 | |
|
556 | 556 | Sometimes it is helpful to show the diff of the changeset in the editor without |
|
557 | 557 | having to prefix 'HG: ' to each line so that highlighting works correctly. For |
|
558 | 558 | this, Mercurial provides a special string which will ignore everything below |
|
559 | 559 | it:: |
|
560 | 560 | |
|
561 | 561 | HG: ------------------------ >8 ------------------------ |
|
562 | 562 | |
|
563 | 563 | For example, the template configuration below will show the diff below the |
|
564 | 564 | extra message:: |
|
565 | 565 | |
|
566 | 566 | [committemplate] |
|
567 | 567 | changeset = {desc}\n\n |
|
568 | 568 | HG: Enter commit message. Lines beginning with 'HG:' are removed. |
|
569 | 569 | HG: {extramsg} |
|
570 | 570 | HG: ------------------------ >8 ------------------------ |
|
571 | 571 | HG: Do not touch the line above. |
|
572 | 572 | HG: Everything below will be removed. |
|
573 | 573 | {diff()} |
|
574 | 574 | |
|
575 | 575 | .. note:: |
|
576 | 576 | |
|
577 | 577 | For some problematic encodings (see :hg:`help win32mbcs` for |
|
578 | 578 | detail), this customization should be configured carefully, to |
|
579 | 579 | avoid showing broken characters. |
|
580 | 580 | |
|
581 | 581 | For example, if a multibyte character ending with backslash (0x5c) is |
|
582 | 582 | followed by the ASCII character 'n' in the customized template, |
|
583 | 583 | the sequence of backslash and 'n' is treated as line-feed unexpectedly |
|
584 | 584 | (and the multibyte character is broken, too). |
|
585 | 585 | |
|
586 | 586 | Customized template is used for commands below (``--edit`` may be |
|
587 | 587 | required): |
|
588 | 588 | |
|
589 | 589 | - :hg:`backout` |
|
590 | 590 | - :hg:`commit` |
|
591 | 591 | - :hg:`fetch` (for merge commit only) |
|
592 | 592 | - :hg:`graft` |
|
593 | 593 | - :hg:`histedit` |
|
594 | 594 | - :hg:`import` |
|
595 | 595 | - :hg:`qfold`, :hg:`qnew` and :hg:`qrefresh` |
|
596 | 596 | - :hg:`rebase` |
|
597 | 597 | - :hg:`shelve` |
|
598 | 598 | - :hg:`sign` |
|
599 | 599 | - :hg:`tag` |
|
600 | 600 | - :hg:`transplant` |
|
601 | 601 | |
|
602 | 602 | Configuring items below instead of ``changeset`` allows showing |
|
603 | 603 | customized message only for specific actions, or showing different |
|
604 | 604 | messages for each action. |
|
605 | 605 | |
|
606 | 606 | - ``changeset.backout`` for :hg:`backout` |
|
607 | 607 | - ``changeset.commit.amend.merge`` for :hg:`commit --amend` on merges |
|
608 | 608 | - ``changeset.commit.amend.normal`` for :hg:`commit --amend` on other |
|
609 | 609 | - ``changeset.commit.normal.merge`` for :hg:`commit` on merges |
|
610 | 610 | - ``changeset.commit.normal.normal`` for :hg:`commit` on other |
|
611 | 611 | - ``changeset.fetch`` for :hg:`fetch` (impling merge commit) |
|
612 | 612 | - ``changeset.gpg.sign`` for :hg:`sign` |
|
613 | 613 | - ``changeset.graft`` for :hg:`graft` |
|
614 | 614 | - ``changeset.histedit.edit`` for ``edit`` of :hg:`histedit` |
|
615 | 615 | - ``changeset.histedit.fold`` for ``fold`` of :hg:`histedit` |
|
616 | 616 | - ``changeset.histedit.mess`` for ``mess`` of :hg:`histedit` |
|
617 | 617 | - ``changeset.histedit.pick`` for ``pick`` of :hg:`histedit` |
|
618 | 618 | - ``changeset.import.bypass`` for :hg:`import --bypass` |
|
619 | 619 | - ``changeset.import.normal.merge`` for :hg:`import` on merges |
|
620 | 620 | - ``changeset.import.normal.normal`` for :hg:`import` on other |
|
621 | 621 | - ``changeset.mq.qnew`` for :hg:`qnew` |
|
622 | 622 | - ``changeset.mq.qfold`` for :hg:`qfold` |
|
623 | 623 | - ``changeset.mq.qrefresh`` for :hg:`qrefresh` |
|
624 | 624 | - ``changeset.rebase.collapse`` for :hg:`rebase --collapse` |
|
625 | 625 | - ``changeset.rebase.merge`` for :hg:`rebase` on merges |
|
626 | 626 | - ``changeset.rebase.normal`` for :hg:`rebase` on other |
|
627 | 627 | - ``changeset.shelve.shelve`` for :hg:`shelve` |
|
628 | 628 | - ``changeset.tag.add`` for :hg:`tag` without ``--remove`` |
|
629 | 629 | - ``changeset.tag.remove`` for :hg:`tag --remove` |
|
630 | 630 | - ``changeset.transplant.merge`` for :hg:`transplant` on merges |
|
631 | 631 | - ``changeset.transplant.normal`` for :hg:`transplant` on other |
|
632 | 632 | |
|
633 | 633 | These dot-separated lists of names are treated as hierarchical ones. |
|
634 | 634 | For example, ``changeset.tag.remove`` customizes the commit message |
|
635 | 635 | only for :hg:`tag --remove`, but ``changeset.tag`` customizes the |
|
636 | 636 | commit message for :hg:`tag` regardless of ``--remove`` option. |
|
637 | 637 | |
|
638 | 638 | When the external editor is invoked for a commit, the corresponding |
|
639 | 639 | dot-separated list of names without the ``changeset.`` prefix |
|
640 | 640 | (e.g. ``commit.normal.normal``) is in the ``HGEDITFORM`` environment |
|
641 | 641 | variable. |
|
642 | 642 | |
|
643 | 643 | In this section, items other than ``changeset`` can be referred from |
|
644 | 644 | others. For example, the configuration to list committed files up |
|
645 | 645 | below can be referred as ``{listupfiles}``:: |
|
646 | 646 | |
|
647 | 647 | [committemplate] |
|
648 | 648 | listupfiles = {file_adds % |
|
649 | 649 | "HG: added {file}\n" }{file_mods % |
|
650 | 650 | "HG: changed {file}\n" }{file_dels % |
|
651 | 651 | "HG: removed {file}\n" }{if(files, "", |
|
652 | 652 | "HG: no files changed\n")} |
|
653 | 653 | |
|
654 | 654 | ``decode/encode`` |
|
655 | 655 | ----------------- |
|
656 | 656 | |
|
657 | 657 | Filters for transforming files on checkout/checkin. This would |
|
658 | 658 | typically be used for newline processing or other |
|
659 | 659 | localization/canonicalization of files. |
|
660 | 660 | |
|
661 | 661 | Filters consist of a filter pattern followed by a filter command. |
|
662 | 662 | Filter patterns are globs by default, rooted at the repository root. |
|
663 | 663 | For example, to match any file ending in ``.txt`` in the root |
|
664 | 664 | directory only, use the pattern ``*.txt``. To match any file ending |
|
665 | 665 | in ``.c`` anywhere in the repository, use the pattern ``**.c``. |
|
666 | 666 | For each file only the first matching filter applies. |
|
667 | 667 | |
|
668 | 668 | The filter command can start with a specifier, either ``pipe:`` or |
|
669 | 669 | ``tempfile:``. If no specifier is given, ``pipe:`` is used by default. |
|
670 | 670 | |
|
671 | 671 | A ``pipe:`` command must accept data on stdin and return the transformed |
|
672 | 672 | data on stdout. |
|
673 | 673 | |
|
674 | 674 | Pipe example:: |
|
675 | 675 | |
|
676 | 676 | [encode] |
|
677 | 677 | # uncompress gzip files on checkin to improve delta compression |
|
678 | 678 | # note: not necessarily a good idea, just an example |
|
679 | 679 | *.gz = pipe: gunzip |
|
680 | 680 | |
|
681 | 681 | [decode] |
|
682 | 682 | # recompress gzip files when writing them to the working dir (we |
|
683 | 683 | # can safely omit "pipe:", because it's the default) |
|
684 | 684 | *.gz = gzip |
|
685 | 685 | |
|
686 | 686 | A ``tempfile:`` command is a template. The string ``INFILE`` is replaced |
|
687 | 687 | with the name of a temporary file that contains the data to be |
|
688 | 688 | filtered by the command. The string ``OUTFILE`` is replaced with the name |
|
689 | 689 | of an empty temporary file, where the filtered data must be written by |
|
690 | 690 | the command. |
|
691 | 691 | |
|
692 | 692 | .. container:: windows |
|
693 | 693 | |
|
694 | 694 | .. note:: |
|
695 | 695 | |
|
696 | 696 | The tempfile mechanism is recommended for Windows systems, |
|
697 | 697 | where the standard shell I/O redirection operators often have |
|
698 | 698 | strange effects and may corrupt the contents of your files. |
|
699 | 699 | |
|
700 | 700 | This filter mechanism is used internally by the ``eol`` extension to |
|
701 | 701 | translate line ending characters between Windows (CRLF) and Unix (LF) |
|
702 | 702 | format. We suggest you use the ``eol`` extension for convenience. |
|
703 | 703 | |
|
704 | 704 | |
|
705 | 705 | ``defaults`` |
|
706 | 706 | ------------ |
|
707 | 707 | |
|
708 | 708 | (defaults are deprecated. Don't use them. Use aliases instead.) |
|
709 | 709 | |
|
710 | 710 | Use the ``[defaults]`` section to define command defaults, i.e. the |
|
711 | 711 | default options/arguments to pass to the specified commands. |
|
712 | 712 | |
|
713 | 713 | The following example makes :hg:`log` run in verbose mode, and |
|
714 | 714 | :hg:`status` show only the modified files, by default:: |
|
715 | 715 | |
|
716 | 716 | [defaults] |
|
717 | 717 | log = -v |
|
718 | 718 | status = -m |
|
719 | 719 | |
|
720 | 720 | The actual commands, instead of their aliases, must be used when |
|
721 | 721 | defining command defaults. The command defaults will also be applied |
|
722 | 722 | to the aliases of the commands defined. |
|
723 | 723 | |
|
724 | 724 | |
|
725 | 725 | ``diff`` |
|
726 | 726 | -------- |
|
727 | 727 | |
|
728 | 728 | Settings used when displaying diffs. Everything except for ``unified`` |
|
729 | 729 | is a Boolean and defaults to False. See :hg:`help config.annotate` |
|
730 | 730 | for related options for the annotate command. |
|
731 | 731 | |
|
732 | 732 | ``git`` |
|
733 | 733 | Use git extended diff format. |
|
734 | 734 | |
|
735 | 735 | ``nobinary`` |
|
736 | 736 | Omit git binary patches. |
|
737 | 737 | |
|
738 | 738 | ``nodates`` |
|
739 | 739 | Don't include dates in diff headers. |
|
740 | 740 | |
|
741 | 741 | ``noprefix`` |
|
742 | 742 | Omit 'a/' and 'b/' prefixes from filenames. Ignored in plain mode. |
|
743 | 743 | |
|
744 | 744 | ``showfunc`` |
|
745 | 745 | Show which function each change is in. |
|
746 | 746 | |
|
747 | 747 | ``ignorews`` |
|
748 | 748 | Ignore white space when comparing lines. |
|
749 | 749 | |
|
750 | 750 | ``ignorewsamount`` |
|
751 | 751 | Ignore changes in the amount of white space. |
|
752 | 752 | |
|
753 | 753 | ``ignoreblanklines`` |
|
754 | 754 | Ignore changes whose lines are all blank. |
|
755 | 755 | |
|
756 | 756 | ``unified`` |
|
757 | 757 | Number of lines of context to show. |
|
758 | 758 | |
|
759 | 759 | ``word-diff`` |
|
760 | 760 | Highlight changed words. |
|
761 | 761 | |
|
762 | 762 | ``email`` |
|
763 | 763 | --------- |
|
764 | 764 | |
|
765 | 765 | Settings for extensions that send email messages. |
|
766 | 766 | |
|
767 | 767 | ``from`` |
|
768 | 768 | Optional. Email address to use in "From" header and SMTP envelope |
|
769 | 769 | of outgoing messages. |
|
770 | 770 | |
|
771 | 771 | ``to`` |
|
772 | 772 | Optional. Comma-separated list of recipients' email addresses. |
|
773 | 773 | |
|
774 | 774 | ``cc`` |
|
775 | 775 | Optional. Comma-separated list of carbon copy recipients' |
|
776 | 776 | email addresses. |
|
777 | 777 | |
|
778 | 778 | ``bcc`` |
|
779 | 779 | Optional. Comma-separated list of blind carbon copy recipients' |
|
780 | 780 | email addresses. |
|
781 | 781 | |
|
782 | 782 | ``method`` |
|
783 | 783 | Optional. Method to use to send email messages. If value is ``smtp`` |
|
784 | 784 | (default), use SMTP (see the ``[smtp]`` section for configuration). |
|
785 | 785 | Otherwise, use as name of program to run that acts like sendmail |
|
786 | 786 | (takes ``-f`` option for sender, list of recipients on command line, |
|
787 | 787 | message on stdin). Normally, setting this to ``sendmail`` or |
|
788 | 788 | ``/usr/sbin/sendmail`` is enough to use sendmail to send messages. |
|
789 | 789 | |
|
790 | 790 | ``charsets`` |
|
791 | 791 | Optional. Comma-separated list of character sets considered |
|
792 | 792 | convenient for recipients. Addresses, headers, and parts not |
|
793 | 793 | containing patches of outgoing messages will be encoded in the |
|
794 | 794 | first character set to which conversion from local encoding |
|
795 | 795 | (``$HGENCODING``, ``ui.fallbackencoding``) succeeds. If correct |
|
796 | 796 | conversion fails, the text in question is sent as is. |
|
797 | 797 | (default: '') |
|
798 | 798 | |
|
799 | 799 | Order of outgoing email character sets: |
|
800 | 800 | |
|
801 | 801 | 1. ``us-ascii``: always first, regardless of settings |
|
802 | 802 | 2. ``email.charsets``: in order given by user |
|
803 | 803 | 3. ``ui.fallbackencoding``: if not in email.charsets |
|
804 | 804 | 4. ``$HGENCODING``: if not in email.charsets |
|
805 | 805 | 5. ``utf-8``: always last, regardless of settings |
|
806 | 806 | |
|
807 | 807 | Email example:: |
|
808 | 808 | |
|
809 | 809 | [email] |
|
810 | 810 | from = Joseph User <joe.user@example.com> |
|
811 | 811 | method = /usr/sbin/sendmail |
|
812 | 812 | # charsets for western Europeans |
|
813 | 813 | # us-ascii, utf-8 omitted, as they are tried first and last |
|
814 | 814 | charsets = iso-8859-1, iso-8859-15, windows-1252 |
|
815 | 815 | |
|
816 | 816 | |
|
817 | 817 | ``extensions`` |
|
818 | 818 | -------------- |
|
819 | 819 | |
|
820 | 820 | Mercurial has an extension mechanism for adding new features. To |
|
821 | 821 | enable an extension, create an entry for it in this section. |
|
822 | 822 | |
|
823 | 823 | If you know that the extension is already in Python's search path, |
|
824 | 824 | you can give the name of the module, followed by ``=``, with nothing |
|
825 | 825 | after the ``=``. |
|
826 | 826 | |
|
827 | 827 | Otherwise, give a name that you choose, followed by ``=``, followed by |
|
828 | 828 | the path to the ``.py`` file (including the file name extension) that |
|
829 | 829 | defines the extension. |
|
830 | 830 | |
|
831 | 831 | To explicitly disable an extension that is enabled in an hgrc of |
|
832 | 832 | broader scope, prepend its path with ``!``, as in ``foo = !/ext/path`` |
|
833 | 833 | or ``foo = !`` when path is not supplied. |
|
834 | 834 | |
|
835 | 835 | Example for ``~/.hgrc``:: |
|
836 | 836 | |
|
837 | 837 | [extensions] |
|
838 | 838 | # (the churn extension will get loaded from Mercurial's path) |
|
839 | 839 | churn = |
|
840 | 840 | # (this extension will get loaded from the file specified) |
|
841 | 841 | myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py |
|
842 | 842 | |
|
843 | 843 | |
|
844 | 844 | ``format`` |
|
845 | 845 | ---------- |
|
846 | 846 | |
|
847 | 847 | Configuration that controls the repository format. Newer format options are more |
|
848 | 848 | powerful, but incompatible with some older versions of Mercurial. Format options |
|
849 | 849 | are considered at repository initialization only. You need to make a new clone |
|
850 | 850 | for config changes to be taken into account. |
|
851 | 851 | |
|
852 | 852 | For more details about repository format and version compatibility, see |
|
853 | 853 | https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/MissingRequirement |
|
854 | 854 | |
|
855 | 855 | ``usegeneraldelta`` |
|
856 | 856 | Enable or disable the "generaldelta" repository format which improves |
|
857 | 857 | repository compression by allowing "revlog" to store deltas against |
|
858 | 858 | arbitrary revisions instead of the previously stored one. This provides |
|
859 | 859 | significant improvement for repositories with branches. |
|
860 | 860 | |
|
861 | 861 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.9. |
|
862 | 862 | |
|
863 | 863 | Enabled by default. |
|
864 | 864 | |
|
865 | 865 | ``dotencode`` |
|
866 | 866 | Enable or disable the "dotencode" repository format which enhances |
|
867 | 867 | the "fncache" repository format (which has to be enabled to use |
|
868 | 868 | dotencode) to avoid issues with filenames starting with "._" on |
|
869 | 869 | Mac OS X and spaces on Windows. |
|
870 | 870 | |
|
871 | 871 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.7. |
|
872 | 872 | |
|
873 | 873 | Enabled by default. |
|
874 | 874 | |
|
875 | 875 | ``usefncache`` |
|
876 | 876 | Enable or disable the "fncache" repository format which enhances |
|
877 | 877 | the "store" repository format (which has to be enabled to use |
|
878 | 878 | fncache) to allow longer filenames and avoids using Windows |
|
879 | 879 | reserved names, e.g. "nul". |
|
880 | 880 | |
|
881 | 881 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.1. |
|
882 | 882 | |
|
883 | 883 | Enabled by default. |
|
884 | 884 | |
|
885 | 885 | ``usestore`` |
|
886 | 886 | Enable or disable the "store" repository format which improves |
|
887 | 887 | compatibility with systems that fold case or otherwise mangle |
|
888 | 888 | filenames. Disabling this option will allow you to store longer filenames |
|
889 | 889 | in some situations at the expense of compatibility. |
|
890 | 890 | |
|
891 | 891 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 0.9.4. |
|
892 | 892 | |
|
893 | 893 | Enabled by default. |
|
894 | 894 | |
|
895 | 895 | ``sparse-revlog`` |
|
896 | 896 | Enable or disable the ``sparse-revlog`` delta strategy. This format improves |
|
897 | 897 | delta re-use inside revlog. For very branchy repositories, it results in a |
|
898 | 898 | smaller store. For repositories with many revisions, it also helps |
|
899 | 899 | performance (by using shortened delta chains.) |
|
900 | 900 | |
|
901 | 901 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 4.7 |
|
902 | 902 | |
|
903 | 903 | Enabled by default. |
|
904 | 904 | |
|
905 | 905 | ``revlog-compression`` |
|
906 | 906 | Compression algorithm used by revlog. Supported values are `zlib` and |
|
907 | 907 | `zstd`. The `zlib` engine is the historical default of Mercurial. `zstd` is |
|
908 | 908 | a newer format that is usually a net win over `zlib`, operating faster at |
|
909 | 909 | better compression rates. Use `zstd` to reduce CPU usage. Multiple values |
|
910 | 910 | can be specified, the first available one will be used. |
|
911 | 911 | |
|
912 | 912 | On some systems, the Mercurial installation may lack `zstd` support. |
|
913 | 913 | |
|
914 | 914 | Default is `zlib`. |
|
915 | 915 | |
|
916 | 916 | ``bookmarks-in-store`` |
|
917 | 917 | Store bookmarks in .hg/store/. This means that bookmarks are shared when |
|
918 | 918 | using `hg share` regardless of the `-B` option. |
|
919 | 919 | |
|
920 | 920 | Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 5.1. |
|
921 | 921 | |
|
922 | 922 | Disabled by default. |
|
923 | 923 | |
|
924 | 924 | |
|
925 | 925 | ``graph`` |
|
926 | 926 | --------- |
|
927 | 927 | |
|
928 | 928 | Web graph view configuration. This section let you change graph |
|
929 | 929 | elements display properties by branches, for instance to make the |
|
930 | 930 | ``default`` branch stand out. |
|
931 | 931 | |
|
932 | 932 | Each line has the following format:: |
|
933 | 933 | |
|
934 | 934 | <branch>.<argument> = <value> |
|
935 | 935 | |
|
936 | 936 | where ``<branch>`` is the name of the branch being |
|
937 | 937 | customized. Example:: |
|
938 | 938 | |
|
939 | 939 | [graph] |
|
940 | 940 | # 2px width |
|
941 | 941 | default.width = 2 |
|
942 | 942 | # red color |
|
943 | 943 | default.color = FF0000 |
|
944 | 944 | |
|
945 | 945 | Supported arguments: |
|
946 | 946 | |
|
947 | 947 | ``width`` |
|
948 | 948 | Set branch edges width in pixels. |
|
949 | 949 | |
|
950 | 950 | ``color`` |
|
951 | 951 | Set branch edges color in hexadecimal RGB notation. |
|
952 | 952 | |
|
953 | 953 | ``hooks`` |
|
954 | 954 | --------- |
|
955 | 955 | |
|
956 | 956 | Commands or Python functions that get automatically executed by |
|
957 | 957 | various actions such as starting or finishing a commit. Multiple |
|
958 | 958 | hooks can be run for the same action by appending a suffix to the |
|
959 | 959 | action. Overriding a site-wide hook can be done by changing its |
|
960 | 960 | value or setting it to an empty string. Hooks can be prioritized |
|
961 | 961 | by adding a prefix of ``priority.`` to the hook name on a new line |
|
962 | 962 | and setting the priority. The default priority is 0. |
|
963 | 963 | |
|
964 | 964 | Example ``.hg/hgrc``:: |
|
965 | 965 | |
|
966 | 966 | [hooks] |
|
967 | 967 | # update working directory after adding changesets |
|
968 | 968 | changegroup.update = hg update |
|
969 | 969 | # do not use the site-wide hook |
|
970 | 970 | incoming = |
|
971 | 971 | incoming.email = /my/email/hook |
|
972 | 972 | incoming.autobuild = /my/build/hook |
|
973 | 973 | # force autobuild hook to run before other incoming hooks |
|
974 | 974 | priority.incoming.autobuild = 1 |
|
975 | 975 | |
|
976 | 976 | Most hooks are run with environment variables set that give useful |
|
977 | 977 | additional information. For each hook below, the environment variables |
|
978 | 978 | it is passed are listed with names in the form ``$HG_foo``. The |
|
979 | 979 | ``$HG_HOOKTYPE`` and ``$HG_HOOKNAME`` variables are set for all hooks. |
|
980 | 980 | They contain the type of hook which triggered the run and the full name |
|
981 | 981 | of the hook in the config, respectively. In the example above, this will |
|
982 | 982 | be ``$HG_HOOKTYPE=incoming`` and ``$HG_HOOKNAME=incoming.email``. |
|
983 | 983 | |
|
984 | 984 | .. container:: windows |
|
985 | 985 | |
|
986 | 986 | Some basic Unix syntax can be enabled for portability, including ``$VAR`` |
|
987 | 987 | and ``${VAR}`` style variables. A ``~`` followed by ``\`` or ``/`` will |
|
988 | 988 | be expanded to ``%USERPROFILE%`` to simulate a subset of tilde expansion |
|
989 | 989 | on Unix. To use a literal ``$`` or ``~``, it must be escaped with a back |
|
990 | 990 | slash or inside of a strong quote. Strong quotes will be replaced by |
|
991 | 991 | double quotes after processing. |
|
992 | 992 | |
|
993 | 993 | This feature is enabled by adding a prefix of ``tonative.`` to the hook |
|
994 | 994 | name on a new line, and setting it to ``True``. For example:: |
|
995 | 995 | |
|
996 | 996 | [hooks] |
|
997 | 997 | incoming.autobuild = /my/build/hook |
|
998 | 998 | # enable translation to cmd.exe syntax for autobuild hook |
|
999 | 999 | tonative.incoming.autobuild = True |
|
1000 | 1000 | |
|
1001 | 1001 | ``changegroup`` |
|
1002 | 1002 | Run after a changegroup has been added via push, pull or unbundle. The ID of |
|
1003 | 1003 | the first new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE`` and last is in ``$HG_NODE_LAST``. |
|
1004 | 1004 | The URL from which changes came is in ``$HG_URL``. |
|
1005 | 1005 | |
|
1006 | 1006 | ``commit`` |
|
1007 | 1007 | Run after a changeset has been created in the local repository. The ID |
|
1008 | 1008 | of the newly created changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``. Parent changeset |
|
1009 | 1009 | IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``. |
|
1010 | 1010 | |
|
1011 | 1011 | ``incoming`` |
|
1012 | 1012 | Run after a changeset has been pulled, pushed, or unbundled into |
|
1013 | 1013 | the local repository. The ID of the newly arrived changeset is in |
|
1014 | 1014 | ``$HG_NODE``. The URL that was source of the changes is in ``$HG_URL``. |
|
1015 | 1015 | |
|
1016 | 1016 | ``outgoing`` |
|
1017 | 1017 | Run after sending changes from the local repository to another. The ID of |
|
1018 | 1018 | first changeset sent is in ``$HG_NODE``. The source of operation is in |
|
1019 | 1019 | ``$HG_SOURCE``. Also see :hg:`help config.hooks.preoutgoing`. |
|
1020 | 1020 | |
|
1021 | 1021 | ``post-<command>`` |
|
1022 | 1022 | Run after successful invocations of the associated command. The |
|
1023 | 1023 | contents of the command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS`` and the result |
|
1024 | 1024 | code in ``$HG_RESULT``. Parsed command line arguments are passed as |
|
1025 | 1025 | ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain string representations of |
|
1026 | 1026 | the python data internally passed to <command>. ``$HG_OPTS`` is a |
|
1027 | 1027 | dictionary of options (with unspecified options set to their defaults). |
|
1028 | 1028 | ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments. Hook failure is ignored. |
|
1029 | 1029 | |
|
1030 | 1030 | ``fail-<command>`` |
|
1031 | 1031 | Run after a failed invocation of an associated command. The contents |
|
1032 | 1032 | of the command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS``. Parsed command line |
|
1033 | 1033 | arguments are passed as ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain |
|
1034 | 1034 | string representations of the python data internally passed to |
|
1035 | 1035 | <command>. ``$HG_OPTS`` is a dictionary of options (with unspecified |
|
1036 | 1036 | options set to their defaults). ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments. |
|
1037 | 1037 | Hook failure is ignored. |
|
1038 | 1038 | |
|
1039 | 1039 | ``pre-<command>`` |
|
1040 | 1040 | Run before executing the associated command. The contents of the |
|
1041 | 1041 | command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS``. Parsed command line arguments |
|
1042 | 1042 | are passed as ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain string |
|
1043 | 1043 | representations of the data internally passed to <command>. ``$HG_OPTS`` |
|
1044 | 1044 | is a dictionary of options (with unspecified options set to their |
|
1045 | 1045 | defaults). ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments. If the hook returns |
|
1046 | 1046 | failure, the command doesn't execute and Mercurial returns the failure |
|
1047 | 1047 | code. |
|
1048 | 1048 | |
|
1049 | 1049 | ``prechangegroup`` |
|
1050 | 1050 | Run before a changegroup is added via push, pull or unbundle. Exit |
|
1051 | 1051 | status 0 allows the changegroup to proceed. A non-zero status will |
|
1052 | 1052 | cause the push, pull or unbundle to fail. The URL from which changes |
|
1053 | 1053 | will come is in ``$HG_URL``. |
|
1054 | 1054 | |
|
1055 | 1055 | ``precommit`` |
|
1056 | 1056 | Run before starting a local commit. Exit status 0 allows the |
|
1057 | 1057 | commit to proceed. A non-zero status will cause the commit to fail. |
|
1058 | 1058 | Parent changeset IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``. |
|
1059 | 1059 | |
|
1060 | 1060 | ``prelistkeys`` |
|
1061 | 1061 | Run before listing pushkeys (like bookmarks) in the |
|
1062 | 1062 | repository. A non-zero status will cause failure. The key namespace is |
|
1063 | 1063 | in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``. |
|
1064 | 1064 | |
|
1065 | 1065 | ``preoutgoing`` |
|
1066 | 1066 | Run before collecting changes to send from the local repository to |
|
1067 | 1067 | another. A non-zero status will cause failure. This lets you prevent |
|
1068 | 1068 | pull over HTTP or SSH. It can also prevent propagating commits (via |
|
1069 | 1069 | local pull, push (outbound) or bundle commands), but not completely, |
|
1070 | 1070 | since you can just copy files instead. The source of operation is in |
|
1071 | 1071 | ``$HG_SOURCE``. If "serve", the operation is happening on behalf of a remote |
|
1072 | 1072 | SSH or HTTP repository. If "push", "pull" or "bundle", the operation |
|
1073 | 1073 | is happening on behalf of a repository on same system. |
|
1074 | 1074 | |
|
1075 | 1075 | ``prepushkey`` |
|
1076 | 1076 | Run before a pushkey (like a bookmark) is added to the |
|
1077 | 1077 | repository. A non-zero status will cause the key to be rejected. The |
|
1078 | 1078 | key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``, the key is in ``$HG_KEY``, |
|
1079 | 1079 | the old value (if any) is in ``$HG_OLD``, and the new value is in |
|
1080 | 1080 | ``$HG_NEW``. |
|
1081 | 1081 | |
|
1082 | 1082 | ``pretag`` |
|
1083 | 1083 | Run before creating a tag. Exit status 0 allows the tag to be |
|
1084 | 1084 | created. A non-zero status will cause the tag to fail. The ID of the |
|
1085 | 1085 | changeset to tag is in ``$HG_NODE``. The name of tag is in ``$HG_TAG``. The |
|
1086 | 1086 | tag is local if ``$HG_LOCAL=1``, or in the repository if ``$HG_LOCAL=0``. |
|
1087 | 1087 | |
|
1088 | 1088 | ``pretxnopen`` |
|
1089 | 1089 | Run before any new repository transaction is open. The reason for the |
|
1090 | 1090 | transaction will be in ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the |
|
1091 | 1091 | transaction will be in ``HG_TXNID``. A non-zero status will prevent the |
|
1092 | 1092 | transaction from being opened. |
|
1093 | 1093 | |
|
1094 | 1094 | ``pretxnclose`` |
|
1095 | 1095 | Run right before the transaction is actually finalized. Any repository change |
|
1096 | 1096 | will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the transaction |
|
1097 | 1097 | content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to proceed. A non-zero |
|
1098 | 1098 | status will cause the transaction to be rolled back. The reason for the |
|
1099 | 1099 | transaction opening will be in ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for |
|
1100 | 1100 | the transaction will be in ``HG_TXNID``. The rest of the available data will |
|
1101 | 1101 | vary according the transaction type. New changesets will add ``$HG_NODE`` |
|
1102 | 1102 | (the ID of the first added changeset), ``$HG_NODE_LAST`` (the ID of the last |
|
1103 | 1103 | added changeset), ``$HG_URL`` and ``$HG_SOURCE`` variables. Bookmark and |
|
1104 | 1104 | phase changes will set ``HG_BOOKMARK_MOVED`` and ``HG_PHASES_MOVED`` to ``1`` |
|
1105 | 1105 | respectively, etc. |
|
1106 | 1106 | |
|
1107 | 1107 | ``pretxnclose-bookmark`` |
|
1108 | 1108 | Run right before a bookmark change is actually finalized. Any repository |
|
1109 | 1109 | change will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the |
|
1110 | 1110 | transaction content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to |
|
1111 | 1111 | proceed. A non-zero status will cause the transaction to be rolled back. |
|
1112 | 1112 | The name of the bookmark will be available in ``$HG_BOOKMARK``, the new |
|
1113 | 1113 | bookmark location will be available in ``$HG_NODE`` while the previous |
|
1114 | 1114 | location will be available in ``$HG_OLDNODE``. In case of a bookmark |
|
1115 | 1115 | creation ``$HG_OLDNODE`` will be empty. In case of deletion ``$HG_NODE`` |
|
1116 | 1116 | will be empty. |
|
1117 | 1117 | In addition, the reason for the transaction opening will be in |
|
1118 | 1118 | ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the transaction will be in |
|
1119 | 1119 | ``HG_TXNID``. |
|
1120 | 1120 | |
|
1121 | 1121 | ``pretxnclose-phase`` |
|
1122 | 1122 | Run right before a phase change is actually finalized. Any repository change |
|
1123 | 1123 | will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the transaction |
|
1124 | 1124 | content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to proceed. A non-zero |
|
1125 | 1125 | status will cause the transaction to be rolled back. The hook is called |
|
1126 | 1126 | multiple times, once for each revision affected by a phase change. |
|
1127 | 1127 | The affected node is available in ``$HG_NODE``, the phase in ``$HG_PHASE`` |
|
1128 | 1128 | while the previous ``$HG_OLDPHASE``. In case of new node, ``$HG_OLDPHASE`` |
|
1129 | 1129 | will be empty. In addition, the reason for the transaction opening will be in |
|
1130 | 1130 | ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the transaction will be in |
|
1131 | 1131 | ``HG_TXNID``. The hook is also run for newly added revisions. In this case |
|
1132 | 1132 | the ``$HG_OLDPHASE`` entry will be empty. |
|
1133 | 1133 | |
|
1134 | 1134 | ``txnclose`` |
|
1135 | 1135 | Run after any repository transaction has been committed. At this |
|
1136 | 1136 | point, the transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run |
|
1137 | 1137 | after the lock is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose` for |
|
1138 | 1138 | details about available variables. |
|
1139 | 1139 | |
|
1140 | 1140 | ``txnclose-bookmark`` |
|
1141 | 1141 | Run after any bookmark change has been committed. At this point, the |
|
1142 | 1142 | transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run after the lock |
|
1143 | 1143 | is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose-bookmark` for details |
|
1144 | 1144 | about available variables. |
|
1145 | 1145 | |
|
1146 | 1146 | ``txnclose-phase`` |
|
1147 | 1147 | Run after any phase change has been committed. At this point, the |
|
1148 | 1148 | transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run after the lock |
|
1149 | 1149 | is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose-phase` for details about |
|
1150 | 1150 | available variables. |
|
1151 | 1151 | |
|
1152 | 1152 | ``txnabort`` |
|
1153 | 1153 | Run when a transaction is aborted. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose` |
|
1154 | 1154 | for details about available variables. |
|
1155 | 1155 | |
|
1156 | 1156 | ``pretxnchangegroup`` |
|
1157 | 1157 | Run after a changegroup has been added via push, pull or unbundle, but before |
|
1158 | 1158 | the transaction has been committed. The changegroup is visible to the hook |
|
1159 | 1159 | program. This allows validation of incoming changes before accepting them. |
|
1160 | 1160 | The ID of the first new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE`` and last is in |
|
1161 | 1161 | ``$HG_NODE_LAST``. Exit status 0 allows the transaction to commit. A non-zero |
|
1162 | 1162 | status will cause the transaction to be rolled back, and the push, pull or |
|
1163 | 1163 | unbundle will fail. The URL that was the source of changes is in ``$HG_URL``. |
|
1164 | 1164 | |
|
1165 | 1165 | ``pretxncommit`` |
|
1166 | 1166 | Run after a changeset has been created, but before the transaction is |
|
1167 | 1167 | committed. The changeset is visible to the hook program. This allows |
|
1168 | 1168 | validation of the commit message and changes. Exit status 0 allows the |
|
1169 | 1169 | commit to proceed. A non-zero status will cause the transaction to |
|
1170 | 1170 | be rolled back. The ID of the new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``. The parent |
|
1171 | 1171 | changeset IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``. |
|
1172 | 1172 | |
|
1173 | 1173 | ``preupdate`` |
|
1174 | 1174 | Run before updating the working directory. Exit status 0 allows |
|
1175 | 1175 | the update to proceed. A non-zero status will prevent the update. |
|
1176 | 1176 | The changeset ID of first new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT1``. If updating to a |
|
1177 | 1177 | merge, the ID of second new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT2``. |
|
1178 | 1178 | |
|
1179 | 1179 | ``listkeys`` |
|
1180 | 1180 | Run after listing pushkeys (like bookmarks) in the repository. The |
|
1181 | 1181 | key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``. ``$HG_VALUES`` is a |
|
1182 | 1182 | dictionary containing the keys and values. |
|
1183 | 1183 | |
|
1184 | 1184 | ``pushkey`` |
|
1185 | 1185 | Run after a pushkey (like a bookmark) is added to the |
|
1186 | 1186 | repository. The key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``, the key is in |
|
1187 | 1187 | ``$HG_KEY``, the old value (if any) is in ``$HG_OLD``, and the new |
|
1188 | 1188 | value is in ``$HG_NEW``. |
|
1189 | 1189 | |
|
1190 | 1190 | ``tag`` |
|
1191 | 1191 | Run after a tag is created. The ID of the tagged changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``. |
|
1192 | 1192 | The name of tag is in ``$HG_TAG``. The tag is local if ``$HG_LOCAL=1``, or in |
|
1193 | 1193 | the repository if ``$HG_LOCAL=0``. |
|
1194 | 1194 | |
|
1195 | 1195 | ``update`` |
|
1196 | 1196 | Run after updating the working directory. The changeset ID of first |
|
1197 | 1197 | new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT1``. If updating to a merge, the ID of second new |
|
1198 | 1198 | parent is in ``$HG_PARENT2``. If the update succeeded, ``$HG_ERROR=0``. If the |
|
1199 | 1199 | update failed (e.g. because conflicts were not resolved), ``$HG_ERROR=1``. |
|
1200 | 1200 | |
|
1201 | 1201 | .. note:: |
|
1202 | 1202 | |
|
1203 | 1203 | It is generally better to use standard hooks rather than the |
|
1204 | 1204 | generic pre- and post- command hooks, as they are guaranteed to be |
|
1205 | 1205 | called in the appropriate contexts for influencing transactions. |
|
1206 | 1206 | Also, hooks like "commit" will be called in all contexts that |
|
1207 | 1207 | generate a commit (e.g. tag) and not just the commit command. |
|
1208 | 1208 | |
|
1209 | 1209 | .. note:: |
|
1210 | 1210 | |
|
1211 | 1211 | Environment variables with empty values may not be passed to |
|
1212 | 1212 | hooks on platforms such as Windows. As an example, ``$HG_PARENT2`` |
|
1213 | 1213 | will have an empty value under Unix-like platforms for non-merge |
|
1214 | 1214 | changesets, while it will not be available at all under Windows. |
|
1215 | 1215 | |
|
1216 | 1216 | The syntax for Python hooks is as follows:: |
|
1217 | 1217 | |
|
1218 | 1218 | hookname = python:modulename.submodule.callable |
|
1219 | 1219 | hookname = python:/path/to/python/module.py:callable |
|
1220 | 1220 | |
|
1221 | 1221 | Python hooks are run within the Mercurial process. Each hook is |
|
1222 | 1222 | called with at least three keyword arguments: a ui object (keyword |
|
1223 | 1223 | ``ui``), a repository object (keyword ``repo``), and a ``hooktype`` |
|
1224 | 1224 | keyword that tells what kind of hook is used. Arguments listed as |
|
1225 | 1225 | environment variables above are passed as keyword arguments, with no |
|
1226 | 1226 | ``HG_`` prefix, and names in lower case. |
|
1227 | 1227 | |
|
1228 | 1228 | If a Python hook returns a "true" value or raises an exception, this |
|
1229 | 1229 | is treated as a failure. |
|
1230 | 1230 | |
|
1231 | 1231 | |
|
1232 | 1232 | ``hostfingerprints`` |
|
1233 | 1233 | -------------------- |
|
1234 | 1234 | |
|
1235 | 1235 | (Deprecated. Use ``[hostsecurity]``'s ``fingerprints`` options instead.) |
|
1236 | 1236 | |
|
1237 | 1237 | Fingerprints of the certificates of known HTTPS servers. |
|
1238 | 1238 | |
|
1239 | 1239 | A HTTPS connection to a server with a fingerprint configured here will |
|
1240 | 1240 | only succeed if the servers certificate matches the fingerprint. |
|
1241 | 1241 | This is very similar to how ssh known hosts works. |
|
1242 | 1242 | |
|
1243 | 1243 | The fingerprint is the SHA-1 hash value of the DER encoded certificate. |
|
1244 | 1244 | Multiple values can be specified (separated by spaces or commas). This can |
|
1245 | 1245 | be used to define both old and new fingerprints while a host transitions |
|
1246 | 1246 | to a new certificate. |
|
1247 | 1247 | |
|
1248 | 1248 | The CA chain and web.cacerts is not used for servers with a fingerprint. |
|
1249 | 1249 | |
|
1250 | 1250 | For example:: |
|
1251 | 1251 | |
|
1252 | 1252 | [hostfingerprints] |
|
1253 | 1253 | hg.intevation.de = fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33 |
|
1254 | 1254 | hg.intevation.org = fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33 |
|
1255 | 1255 | |
|
1256 | 1256 | ``hostsecurity`` |
|
1257 | 1257 | ---------------- |
|
1258 | 1258 | |
|
1259 | 1259 | Used to specify global and per-host security settings for connecting to |
|
1260 | 1260 | other machines. |
|
1261 | 1261 | |
|
1262 | 1262 | The following options control default behavior for all hosts. |
|
1263 | 1263 | |
|
1264 | 1264 | ``ciphers`` |
|
1265 | 1265 | Defines the cryptographic ciphers to use for connections. |
|
1266 | 1266 | |
|
1267 | 1267 | Value must be a valid OpenSSL Cipher List Format as documented at |
|
1268 | 1268 | https://www.openssl.org/docs/manmaster/apps/ciphers.html#CIPHER-LIST-FORMAT. |
|
1269 | 1269 | |
|
1270 | 1270 | This setting is for advanced users only. Setting to incorrect values |
|
1271 | 1271 | can significantly lower connection security or decrease performance. |
|
1272 | 1272 | You have been warned. |
|
1273 | 1273 | |
|
1274 | 1274 | This option requires Python 2.7. |
|
1275 | 1275 | |
|
1276 | 1276 | ``minimumprotocol`` |
|
1277 | 1277 | Defines the minimum channel encryption protocol to use. |
|
1278 | 1278 | |
|
1279 | 1279 | By default, the highest version of TLS supported by both client and server |
|
1280 | 1280 | is used. |
|
1281 | 1281 | |
|
1282 | 1282 | Allowed values are: ``tls1.0``, ``tls1.1``, ``tls1.2``. |
|
1283 | 1283 | |
|
1284 | 1284 | When running on an old Python version, only ``tls1.0`` is allowed since |
|
1285 | 1285 | old versions of Python only support up to TLS 1.0. |
|
1286 | 1286 | |
|
1287 | 1287 | When running a Python that supports modern TLS versions, the default is |
|
1288 | 1288 | ``tls1.1``. ``tls1.0`` can still be used to allow TLS 1.0. However, this |
|
1289 | 1289 | weakens security and should only be used as a feature of last resort if |
|
1290 | 1290 | a server does not support TLS 1.1+. |
|
1291 | 1291 | |
|
1292 | 1292 | Options in the ``[hostsecurity]`` section can have the form |
|
1293 | 1293 | ``hostname``:``setting``. This allows multiple settings to be defined on a |
|
1294 | 1294 | per-host basis. |
|
1295 | 1295 | |
|
1296 | 1296 | The following per-host settings can be defined. |
|
1297 | 1297 | |
|
1298 | 1298 | ``ciphers`` |
|
1299 | 1299 | This behaves like ``ciphers`` as described above except it only applies |
|
1300 | 1300 | to the host on which it is defined. |
|
1301 | 1301 | |
|
1302 | 1302 | ``fingerprints`` |
|
1303 | 1303 | A list of hashes of the DER encoded peer/remote certificate. Values have |
|
1304 | 1304 | the form ``algorithm``:``fingerprint``. e.g. |
|
1305 | 1305 | ``sha256:c3ab8ff13720e8ad9047dd39466b3c8974e592c2fa383d4a3960714caef0c4f2``. |
|
1306 | 1306 | In addition, colons (``:``) can appear in the fingerprint part. |
|
1307 | 1307 | |
|
1308 | 1308 | The following algorithms/prefixes are supported: ``sha1``, ``sha256``, |
|
1309 | 1309 | ``sha512``. |
|
1310 | 1310 | |
|
1311 | 1311 | Use of ``sha256`` or ``sha512`` is preferred. |
|
1312 | 1312 | |
|
1313 | 1313 | If a fingerprint is specified, the CA chain is not validated for this |
|
1314 | 1314 | host and Mercurial will require the remote certificate to match one |
|
1315 | 1315 | of the fingerprints specified. This means if the server updates its |
|
1316 | 1316 | certificate, Mercurial will abort until a new fingerprint is defined. |
|
1317 | 1317 | This can provide stronger security than traditional CA-based validation |
|
1318 | 1318 | at the expense of convenience. |
|
1319 | 1319 | |
|
1320 | 1320 | This option takes precedence over ``verifycertsfile``. |
|
1321 | 1321 | |
|
1322 | 1322 | ``minimumprotocol`` |
|
1323 | 1323 | This behaves like ``minimumprotocol`` as described above except it |
|
1324 | 1324 | only applies to the host on which it is defined. |
|
1325 | 1325 | |
|
1326 | 1326 | ``verifycertsfile`` |
|
1327 | 1327 | Path to file a containing a list of PEM encoded certificates used to |
|
1328 | 1328 | verify the server certificate. Environment variables and ``~user`` |
|
1329 | 1329 | constructs are expanded in the filename. |
|
1330 | 1330 | |
|
1331 | 1331 | The server certificate or the certificate's certificate authority (CA) |
|
1332 | 1332 | must match a certificate from this file or certificate verification |
|
1333 | 1333 | will fail and connections to the server will be refused. |
|
1334 | 1334 | |
|
1335 | 1335 | If defined, only certificates provided by this file will be used: |
|
1336 | 1336 | ``web.cacerts`` and any system/default certificates will not be |
|
1337 | 1337 | used. |
|
1338 | 1338 | |
|
1339 | 1339 | This option has no effect if the per-host ``fingerprints`` option |
|
1340 | 1340 | is set. |
|
1341 | 1341 | |
|
1342 | 1342 | The format of the file is as follows:: |
|
1343 | 1343 | |
|
1344 | 1344 | -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- |
|
1345 | 1345 | ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ... |
|
1346 | 1346 | -----END CERTIFICATE----- |
|
1347 | 1347 | -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- |
|
1348 | 1348 | ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ... |
|
1349 | 1349 | -----END CERTIFICATE----- |
|
1350 | 1350 | |
|
1351 | 1351 | For example:: |
|
1352 | 1352 | |
|
1353 | 1353 | [hostsecurity] |
|
1354 | 1354 | hg.example.com:fingerprints = sha256:c3ab8ff13720e8ad9047dd39466b3c8974e592c2fa383d4a3960714caef0c4f2 |
|
1355 | 1355 | hg2.example.com:fingerprints = sha1:914f1aff87249c09b6859b88b1906d30756491ca, sha1:fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33 |
|
1356 | 1356 | hg3.example.com:fingerprints = sha256:9a:b0:dc:e2:75:ad:8a:b7:84:58:e5:1f:07:32:f1:87:e6:bd:24:22:af:b7:ce:8e:9c:b4:10:cf:b9:f4:0e:d2 |
|
1357 | 1357 | foo.example.com:verifycertsfile = /etc/ssl/trusted-ca-certs.pem |
|
1358 | 1358 | |
|
1359 | 1359 | To change the default minimum protocol version to TLS 1.2 but to allow TLS 1.1 |
|
1360 | 1360 | when connecting to ``hg.example.com``:: |
|
1361 | 1361 | |
|
1362 | 1362 | [hostsecurity] |
|
1363 | 1363 | minimumprotocol = tls1.2 |
|
1364 | 1364 | hg.example.com:minimumprotocol = tls1.1 |
|
1365 | 1365 | |
|
1366 | 1366 | ``http_proxy`` |
|
1367 | 1367 | -------------- |
|
1368 | 1368 | |
|
1369 | 1369 | Used to access web-based Mercurial repositories through a HTTP |
|
1370 | 1370 | proxy. |
|
1371 | 1371 | |
|
1372 | 1372 | ``host`` |
|
1373 | 1373 | Host name and (optional) port of the proxy server, for example |
|
1374 | 1374 | "myproxy:8000". |
|
1375 | 1375 | |
|
1376 | 1376 | ``no`` |
|
1377 | 1377 | Optional. Comma-separated list of host names that should bypass |
|
1378 | 1378 | the proxy. |
|
1379 | 1379 | |
|
1380 | 1380 | ``passwd`` |
|
1381 | 1381 | Optional. Password to authenticate with at the proxy server. |
|
1382 | 1382 | |
|
1383 | 1383 | ``user`` |
|
1384 | 1384 | Optional. User name to authenticate with at the proxy server. |
|
1385 | 1385 | |
|
1386 | 1386 | ``always`` |
|
1387 | 1387 | Optional. Always use the proxy, even for localhost and any entries |
|
1388 | 1388 | in ``http_proxy.no``. (default: False) |
|
1389 | 1389 | |
|
1390 | 1390 | ``http`` |
|
1391 | 1391 | ---------- |
|
1392 | 1392 | |
|
1393 | 1393 | Used to configure access to Mercurial repositories via HTTP. |
|
1394 | 1394 | |
|
1395 | 1395 | ``timeout`` |
|
1396 | 1396 | If set, blocking operations will timeout after that many seconds. |
|
1397 | 1397 | (default: None) |
|
1398 | 1398 | |
|
1399 | 1399 | ``merge`` |
|
1400 | 1400 | --------- |
|
1401 | 1401 | |
|
1402 | 1402 | This section specifies behavior during merges and updates. |
|
1403 | 1403 | |
|
1404 | 1404 | ``checkignored`` |
|
1405 | 1405 | Controls behavior when an ignored file on disk has the same name as a tracked |
|
1406 | 1406 | file in the changeset being merged or updated to, and has different |
|
1407 | 1407 | contents. Options are ``abort``, ``warn`` and ``ignore``. With ``abort``, |
|
1408 | 1408 | abort on such files. With ``warn``, warn on such files and back them up as |
|
1409 | 1409 | ``.orig``. With ``ignore``, don't print a warning and back them up as |
|
1410 | 1410 | ``.orig``. (default: ``abort``) |
|
1411 | 1411 | |
|
1412 | 1412 | ``checkunknown`` |
|
1413 | 1413 | Controls behavior when an unknown file that isn't ignored has the same name |
|
1414 | 1414 | as a tracked file in the changeset being merged or updated to, and has |
|
1415 | 1415 | different contents. Similar to ``merge.checkignored``, except for files that |
|
1416 | 1416 | are not ignored. (default: ``abort``) |
|
1417 | 1417 | |
|
1418 | 1418 | ``on-failure`` |
|
1419 | 1419 | When set to ``continue`` (the default), the merge process attempts to |
|
1420 | 1420 | merge all unresolved files using the merge chosen tool, regardless of |
|
1421 | 1421 | whether previous file merge attempts during the process succeeded or not. |
|
1422 | 1422 | Setting this to ``prompt`` will prompt after any merge failure continue |
|
1423 | 1423 | or halt the merge process. Setting this to ``halt`` will automatically |
|
1424 | 1424 | halt the merge process on any merge tool failure. The merge process |
|
1425 | 1425 | can be restarted by using the ``resolve`` command. When a merge is |
|
1426 | 1426 | halted, the repository is left in a normal ``unresolved`` merge state. |
|
1427 | 1427 | (default: ``continue``) |
|
1428 | 1428 | |
|
1429 | 1429 | ``strict-capability-check`` |
|
1430 | 1430 | Whether capabilities of internal merge tools are checked strictly |
|
1431 | 1431 | or not, while examining rules to decide merge tool to be used. |
|
1432 | 1432 | (default: False) |
|
1433 | 1433 | |
|
1434 | 1434 | ``merge-patterns`` |
|
1435 | 1435 | ------------------ |
|
1436 | 1436 | |
|
1437 | 1437 | This section specifies merge tools to associate with particular file |
|
1438 | 1438 | patterns. Tools matched here will take precedence over the default |
|
1439 | 1439 | merge tool. Patterns are globs by default, rooted at the repository |
|
1440 | 1440 | root. |
|
1441 | 1441 | |
|
1442 | 1442 | Example:: |
|
1443 | 1443 | |
|
1444 | 1444 | [merge-patterns] |
|
1445 | 1445 | **.c = kdiff3 |
|
1446 | 1446 | **.jpg = myimgmerge |
|
1447 | 1447 | |
|
1448 | 1448 | ``merge-tools`` |
|
1449 | 1449 | --------------- |
|
1450 | 1450 | |
|
1451 | 1451 | This section configures external merge tools to use for file-level |
|
1452 | 1452 | merges. This section has likely been preconfigured at install time. |
|
1453 | 1453 | Use :hg:`config merge-tools` to check the existing configuration. |
|
1454 | 1454 | Also see :hg:`help merge-tools` for more details. |
|
1455 | 1455 | |
|
1456 | 1456 | Example ``~/.hgrc``:: |
|
1457 | 1457 | |
|
1458 | 1458 | [merge-tools] |
|
1459 | 1459 | # Override stock tool location |
|
1460 | 1460 | kdiff3.executable = ~/bin/kdiff3 |
|
1461 | 1461 | # Specify command line |
|
1462 | 1462 | kdiff3.args = $base $local $other -o $output |
|
1463 | 1463 | # Give higher priority |
|
1464 | 1464 | kdiff3.priority = 1 |
|
1465 | 1465 | |
|
1466 | 1466 | # Changing the priority of preconfigured tool |
|
1467 | 1467 | meld.priority = 0 |
|
1468 | 1468 | |
|
1469 | 1469 | # Disable a preconfigured tool |
|
1470 | 1470 | vimdiff.disabled = yes |
|
1471 | 1471 | |
|
1472 | 1472 | # Define new tool |
|
1473 | 1473 | myHtmlTool.args = -m $local $other $base $output |
|
1474 | 1474 | myHtmlTool.regkey = Software\FooSoftware\HtmlMerge |
|
1475 | 1475 | myHtmlTool.priority = 1 |
|
1476 | 1476 | |
|
1477 | 1477 | Supported arguments: |
|
1478 | 1478 | |
|
1479 | 1479 | ``priority`` |
|
1480 | 1480 | The priority in which to evaluate this tool. |
|
1481 | 1481 | (default: 0) |
|
1482 | 1482 | |
|
1483 | 1483 | ``executable`` |
|
1484 | 1484 | Either just the name of the executable or its pathname. |
|
1485 | 1485 | |
|
1486 | 1486 | .. container:: windows |
|
1487 | 1487 | |
|
1488 | 1488 | On Windows, the path can use environment variables with ${ProgramFiles} |
|
1489 | 1489 | syntax. |
|
1490 | 1490 | |
|
1491 | 1491 | (default: the tool name) |
|
1492 | 1492 | |
|
1493 | 1493 | ``args`` |
|
1494 | 1494 | The arguments to pass to the tool executable. You can refer to the |
|
1495 | 1495 | files being merged as well as the output file through these |
|
1496 | 1496 | variables: ``$base``, ``$local``, ``$other``, ``$output``. |
|
1497 | 1497 | |
|
1498 | 1498 | The meaning of ``$local`` and ``$other`` can vary depending on which action is |
|
1499 | 1499 | being performed. During an update or merge, ``$local`` represents the original |
|
1500 | 1500 | state of the file, while ``$other`` represents the commit you are updating to or |
|
1501 | 1501 | the commit you are merging with. During a rebase, ``$local`` represents the |
|
1502 | 1502 | destination of the rebase, and ``$other`` represents the commit being rebased. |
|
1503 | 1503 | |
|
1504 | 1504 | Some operations define custom labels to assist with identifying the revisions, |
|
1505 | 1505 | accessible via ``$labellocal``, ``$labelother``, and ``$labelbase``. If custom |
|
1506 | 1506 | labels are not available, these will be ``local``, ``other``, and ``base``, |
|
1507 | 1507 | respectively. |
|
1508 | 1508 | (default: ``$local $base $other``) |
|
1509 | 1509 | |
|
1510 | 1510 | ``premerge`` |
|
1511 | 1511 | Attempt to run internal non-interactive 3-way merge tool before |
|
1512 | 1512 | launching external tool. Options are ``true``, ``false``, ``keep`` or |
|
1513 | 1513 | ``keep-merge3``. The ``keep`` option will leave markers in the file if the |
|
1514 | 1514 | premerge fails. The ``keep-merge3`` will do the same but include information |
|
1515 | 1515 | about the base of the merge in the marker (see internal :merge3 in |
|
1516 | 1516 | :hg:`help merge-tools`). |
|
1517 | 1517 | (default: True) |
|
1518 | 1518 | |
|
1519 | 1519 | ``binary`` |
|
1520 | 1520 | This tool can merge binary files. (default: False, unless tool |
|
1521 | 1521 | was selected by file pattern match) |
|
1522 | 1522 | |
|
1523 | 1523 | ``symlink`` |
|
1524 | 1524 | This tool can merge symlinks. (default: False) |
|
1525 | 1525 | |
|
1526 | 1526 | ``check`` |
|
1527 | 1527 | A list of merge success-checking options: |
|
1528 | 1528 | |
|
1529 | 1529 | ``changed`` |
|
1530 | 1530 | Ask whether merge was successful when the merged file shows no changes. |
|
1531 | 1531 | ``conflicts`` |
|
1532 | 1532 | Check whether there are conflicts even though the tool reported success. |
|
1533 | 1533 | ``prompt`` |
|
1534 | 1534 | Always prompt for merge success, regardless of success reported by tool. |
|
1535 | 1535 | |
|
1536 | 1536 | ``fixeol`` |
|
1537 | 1537 | Attempt to fix up EOL changes caused by the merge tool. |
|
1538 | 1538 | (default: False) |
|
1539 | 1539 | |
|
1540 | 1540 | ``gui`` |
|
1541 | 1541 | This tool requires a graphical interface to run. (default: False) |
|
1542 | 1542 | |
|
1543 | 1543 | ``mergemarkers`` |
|
1544 | 1544 | Controls whether the labels passed via ``$labellocal``, ``$labelother``, and |
|
1545 | 1545 | ``$labelbase`` are ``detailed`` (respecting ``mergemarkertemplate``) or |
|
1546 | 1546 | ``basic``. If ``premerge`` is ``keep`` or ``keep-merge3``, the conflict |
|
1547 | 1547 | markers generated during premerge will be ``detailed`` if either this option or |
|
1548 | 1548 | the corresponding option in the ``[ui]`` section is ``detailed``. |
|
1549 | 1549 | (default: ``basic``) |
|
1550 | 1550 | |
|
1551 | 1551 | ``mergemarkertemplate`` |
|
1552 | 1552 | This setting can be used to override ``mergemarkertemplate`` from the ``[ui]`` |
|
1553 | 1553 | section on a per-tool basis; this applies to the ``$label``-prefixed variables |
|
1554 | 1554 | and to the conflict markers that are generated if ``premerge`` is ``keep` or |
|
1555 | 1555 | ``keep-merge3``. See the corresponding variable in ``[ui]`` for more |
|
1556 | 1556 | information. |
|
1557 | 1557 | |
|
1558 | 1558 | .. container:: windows |
|
1559 | 1559 | |
|
1560 | 1560 | ``regkey`` |
|
1561 | 1561 | Windows registry key which describes install location of this |
|
1562 | 1562 | tool. Mercurial will search for this key first under |
|
1563 | 1563 | ``HKEY_CURRENT_USER`` and then under ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE``. |
|
1564 | 1564 | (default: None) |
|
1565 | 1565 | |
|
1566 | 1566 | ``regkeyalt`` |
|
1567 | 1567 | An alternate Windows registry key to try if the first key is not |
|
1568 | 1568 | found. The alternate key uses the same ``regname`` and ``regappend`` |
|
1569 | 1569 | semantics of the primary key. The most common use for this key |
|
1570 | 1570 | is to search for 32bit applications on 64bit operating systems. |
|
1571 | 1571 | (default: None) |
|
1572 | 1572 | |
|
1573 | 1573 | ``regname`` |
|
1574 | 1574 | Name of value to read from specified registry key. |
|
1575 | 1575 | (default: the unnamed (default) value) |
|
1576 | 1576 | |
|
1577 | 1577 | ``regappend`` |
|
1578 | 1578 | String to append to the value read from the registry, typically |
|
1579 | 1579 | the executable name of the tool. |
|
1580 | 1580 | (default: None) |
|
1581 | 1581 | |
|
1582 | 1582 | ``pager`` |
|
1583 | 1583 | --------- |
|
1584 | 1584 | |
|
1585 | 1585 | Setting used to control when to paginate and with what external tool. See |
|
1586 | 1586 | :hg:`help pager` for details. |
|
1587 | 1587 | |
|
1588 | 1588 | ``pager`` |
|
1589 | 1589 | Define the external tool used as pager. |
|
1590 | 1590 | |
|
1591 | 1591 | If no pager is set, Mercurial uses the environment variable $PAGER. |
|
1592 | 1592 | If neither pager.pager, nor $PAGER is set, a default pager will be |
|
1593 | 1593 | used, typically `less` on Unix and `more` on Windows. Example:: |
|
1594 | 1594 | |
|
1595 | 1595 | [pager] |
|
1596 | 1596 | pager = less -FRX |
|
1597 | 1597 | |
|
1598 | 1598 | ``ignore`` |
|
1599 | 1599 | List of commands to disable the pager for. Example:: |
|
1600 | 1600 | |
|
1601 | 1601 | [pager] |
|
1602 | 1602 | ignore = version, help, update |
|
1603 | 1603 | |
|
1604 | 1604 | ``patch`` |
|
1605 | 1605 | --------- |
|
1606 | 1606 | |
|
1607 | 1607 | Settings used when applying patches, for instance through the 'import' |
|
1608 | 1608 | command or with Mercurial Queues extension. |
|
1609 | 1609 | |
|
1610 | 1610 | ``eol`` |
|
1611 | 1611 | When set to 'strict' patch content and patched files end of lines |
|
1612 | 1612 | are preserved. When set to ``lf`` or ``crlf``, both files end of |
|
1613 | 1613 | lines are ignored when patching and the result line endings are |
|
1614 | 1614 | normalized to either LF (Unix) or CRLF (Windows). When set to |
|
1615 | 1615 | ``auto``, end of lines are again ignored while patching but line |
|
1616 | 1616 | endings in patched files are normalized to their original setting |
|
1617 | 1617 | on a per-file basis. If target file does not exist or has no end |
|
1618 | 1618 | of line, patch line endings are preserved. |
|
1619 | 1619 | (default: strict) |
|
1620 | 1620 | |
|
1621 | 1621 | ``fuzz`` |
|
1622 | 1622 | The number of lines of 'fuzz' to allow when applying patches. This |
|
1623 | 1623 | controls how much context the patcher is allowed to ignore when |
|
1624 | 1624 | trying to apply a patch. |
|
1625 | 1625 | (default: 2) |
|
1626 | 1626 | |
|
1627 | 1627 | ``paths`` |
|
1628 | 1628 | --------- |
|
1629 | 1629 | |
|
1630 | 1630 | Assigns symbolic names and behavior to repositories. |
|
1631 | 1631 | |
|
1632 | 1632 | Options are symbolic names defining the URL or directory that is the |
|
1633 | 1633 | location of the repository. Example:: |
|
1634 | 1634 | |
|
1635 | 1635 | [paths] |
|
1636 | 1636 | my_server = https://example.com/my_repo |
|
1637 | 1637 | local_path = /home/me/repo |
|
1638 | 1638 | |
|
1639 | 1639 | These symbolic names can be used from the command line. To pull |
|
1640 | 1640 | from ``my_server``: :hg:`pull my_server`. To push to ``local_path``: |
|
1641 | 1641 | :hg:`push local_path`. |
|
1642 | 1642 | |
|
1643 | 1643 | Options containing colons (``:``) denote sub-options that can influence |
|
1644 | 1644 | behavior for that specific path. Example:: |
|
1645 | 1645 | |
|
1646 | 1646 | [paths] |
|
1647 | 1647 | my_server = https://example.com/my_path |
|
1648 | 1648 | my_server:pushurl = ssh://example.com/my_path |
|
1649 | 1649 | |
|
1650 | 1650 | The following sub-options can be defined: |
|
1651 | 1651 | |
|
1652 | 1652 | ``pushurl`` |
|
1653 | 1653 | The URL to use for push operations. If not defined, the location |
|
1654 | 1654 | defined by the path's main entry is used. |
|
1655 | 1655 | |
|
1656 | 1656 | ``pushrev`` |
|
1657 | 1657 | A revset defining which revisions to push by default. |
|
1658 | 1658 | |
|
1659 | 1659 | When :hg:`push` is executed without a ``-r`` argument, the revset |
|
1660 | 1660 | defined by this sub-option is evaluated to determine what to push. |
|
1661 | 1661 | |
|
1662 | 1662 | For example, a value of ``.`` will push the working directory's |
|
1663 | 1663 | revision by default. |
|
1664 | 1664 | |
|
1665 | 1665 | Revsets specifying bookmarks will not result in the bookmark being |
|
1666 | 1666 | pushed. |
|
1667 | 1667 | |
|
1668 | 1668 | The following special named paths exist: |
|
1669 | 1669 | |
|
1670 | 1670 | ``default`` |
|
1671 | 1671 | The URL or directory to use when no source or remote is specified. |
|
1672 | 1672 | |
|
1673 | 1673 | :hg:`clone` will automatically define this path to the location the |
|
1674 | 1674 | repository was cloned from. |
|
1675 | 1675 | |
|
1676 | 1676 | ``default-push`` |
|
1677 | 1677 | (deprecated) The URL or directory for the default :hg:`push` location. |
|
1678 | 1678 | ``default:pushurl`` should be used instead. |
|
1679 | 1679 | |
|
1680 | 1680 | ``phases`` |
|
1681 | 1681 | ---------- |
|
1682 | 1682 | |
|
1683 | 1683 | Specifies default handling of phases. See :hg:`help phases` for more |
|
1684 | 1684 | information about working with phases. |
|
1685 | 1685 | |
|
1686 | 1686 | ``publish`` |
|
1687 | 1687 | Controls draft phase behavior when working as a server. When true, |
|
1688 | 1688 | pushed changesets are set to public in both client and server and |
|
1689 | 1689 | pulled or cloned changesets are set to public in the client. |
|
1690 | 1690 | (default: True) |
|
1691 | 1691 | |
|
1692 | 1692 | ``new-commit`` |
|
1693 | 1693 | Phase of newly-created commits. |
|
1694 | 1694 | (default: draft) |
|
1695 | 1695 | |
|
1696 | 1696 | ``checksubrepos`` |
|
1697 | 1697 | Check the phase of the current revision of each subrepository. Allowed |
|
1698 | 1698 | values are "ignore", "follow" and "abort". For settings other than |
|
1699 | 1699 | "ignore", the phase of the current revision of each subrepository is |
|
1700 | 1700 | checked before committing the parent repository. If any of those phases is |
|
1701 | 1701 | greater than the phase of the parent repository (e.g. if a subrepo is in a |
|
1702 | 1702 | "secret" phase while the parent repo is in "draft" phase), the commit is |
|
1703 | 1703 | either aborted (if checksubrepos is set to "abort") or the higher phase is |
|
1704 | 1704 | used for the parent repository commit (if set to "follow"). |
|
1705 | 1705 | (default: follow) |
|
1706 | 1706 | |
|
1707 | 1707 | |
|
1708 | 1708 | ``profiling`` |
|
1709 | 1709 | ------------- |
|
1710 | 1710 | |
|
1711 | 1711 | Specifies profiling type, format, and file output. Two profilers are |
|
1712 | 1712 | supported: an instrumenting profiler (named ``ls``), and a sampling |
|
1713 | 1713 | profiler (named ``stat``). |
|
1714 | 1714 | |
|
1715 | 1715 | In this section description, 'profiling data' stands for the raw data |
|
1716 | 1716 | collected during profiling, while 'profiling report' stands for a |
|
1717 | 1717 | statistical text report generated from the profiling data. |
|
1718 | 1718 | |
|
1719 | 1719 | ``enabled`` |
|
1720 | 1720 | Enable the profiler. |
|
1721 | 1721 | (default: false) |
|
1722 | 1722 | |
|
1723 | 1723 | This is equivalent to passing ``--profile`` on the command line. |
|
1724 | 1724 | |
|
1725 | 1725 | ``type`` |
|
1726 | 1726 | The type of profiler to use. |
|
1727 | 1727 | (default: stat) |
|
1728 | 1728 | |
|
1729 | 1729 | ``ls`` |
|
1730 | 1730 | Use Python's built-in instrumenting profiler. This profiler |
|
1731 | 1731 | works on all platforms, but each line number it reports is the |
|
1732 | 1732 | first line of a function. This restriction makes it difficult to |
|
1733 | 1733 | identify the expensive parts of a non-trivial function. |
|
1734 | 1734 | ``stat`` |
|
1735 | 1735 | Use a statistical profiler, statprof. This profiler is most |
|
1736 | 1736 | useful for profiling commands that run for longer than about 0.1 |
|
1737 | 1737 | seconds. |
|
1738 | 1738 | |
|
1739 | 1739 | ``format`` |
|
1740 | 1740 | Profiling format. Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler. |
|
1741 | 1741 | (default: text) |
|
1742 | 1742 | |
|
1743 | 1743 | ``text`` |
|
1744 | 1744 | Generate a profiling report. When saving to a file, it should be |
|
1745 | 1745 | noted that only the report is saved, and the profiling data is |
|
1746 | 1746 | not kept. |
|
1747 | 1747 | ``kcachegrind`` |
|
1748 | 1748 | Format profiling data for kcachegrind use: when saving to a |
|
1749 | 1749 | file, the generated file can directly be loaded into |
|
1750 | 1750 | kcachegrind. |
|
1751 | 1751 | |
|
1752 | 1752 | ``statformat`` |
|
1753 | 1753 | Profiling format for the ``stat`` profiler. |
|
1754 | 1754 | (default: hotpath) |
|
1755 | 1755 | |
|
1756 | 1756 | ``hotpath`` |
|
1757 | 1757 | Show a tree-based display containing the hot path of execution (where |
|
1758 | 1758 | most time was spent). |
|
1759 | 1759 | ``bymethod`` |
|
1760 | 1760 | Show a table of methods ordered by how frequently they are active. |
|
1761 | 1761 | ``byline`` |
|
1762 | 1762 | Show a table of lines in files ordered by how frequently they are active. |
|
1763 | 1763 | ``json`` |
|
1764 | 1764 | Render profiling data as JSON. |
|
1765 | 1765 | |
|
1766 | 1766 | ``frequency`` |
|
1767 | 1767 | Sampling frequency. Specific to the ``stat`` sampling profiler. |
|
1768 | 1768 | (default: 1000) |
|
1769 | 1769 | |
|
1770 | 1770 | ``output`` |
|
1771 | 1771 | File path where profiling data or report should be saved. If the |
|
1772 | 1772 | file exists, it is replaced. (default: None, data is printed on |
|
1773 | 1773 | stderr) |
|
1774 | 1774 | |
|
1775 | 1775 | ``sort`` |
|
1776 | 1776 | Sort field. Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler. |
|
1777 | 1777 | One of ``callcount``, ``reccallcount``, ``totaltime`` and |
|
1778 | 1778 | ``inlinetime``. |
|
1779 | 1779 | (default: inlinetime) |
|
1780 | 1780 | |
|
1781 | 1781 | ``time-track`` |
|
1782 | 1782 | Control if the stat profiler track ``cpu`` or ``real`` time. |
|
1783 | 1783 | (default: ``cpu`` on Windows, otherwise ``real``) |
|
1784 | 1784 | |
|
1785 | 1785 | ``limit`` |
|
1786 | 1786 | Number of lines to show. Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler. |
|
1787 | 1787 | (default: 30) |
|
1788 | 1788 | |
|
1789 | 1789 | ``nested`` |
|
1790 | 1790 | Show at most this number of lines of drill-down info after each main entry. |
|
1791 | 1791 | This can help explain the difference between Total and Inline. |
|
1792 | 1792 | Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler. |
|
1793 | 1793 | (default: 0) |
|
1794 | 1794 | |
|
1795 | 1795 | ``showmin`` |
|
1796 | 1796 | Minimum fraction of samples an entry must have for it to be displayed. |
|
1797 | 1797 | Can be specified as a float between ``0.0`` and ``1.0`` or can have a |
|
1798 | 1798 | ``%`` afterwards to allow values up to ``100``. e.g. ``5%``. |
|
1799 | 1799 | |
|
1800 | 1800 | Only used by the ``stat`` profiler. |
|
1801 | 1801 | |
|
1802 | 1802 | For the ``hotpath`` format, default is ``0.05``. |
|
1803 | 1803 | For the ``chrome`` format, default is ``0.005``. |
|
1804 | 1804 | |
|
1805 | 1805 | The option is unused on other formats. |
|
1806 | 1806 | |
|
1807 | 1807 | ``showmax`` |
|
1808 | 1808 | Maximum fraction of samples an entry can have before it is ignored in |
|
1809 | 1809 | display. Values format is the same as ``showmin``. |
|
1810 | 1810 | |
|
1811 | 1811 | Only used by the ``stat`` profiler. |
|
1812 | 1812 | |
|
1813 | 1813 | For the ``chrome`` format, default is ``0.999``. |
|
1814 | 1814 | |
|
1815 | 1815 | The option is unused on other formats. |
|
1816 | 1816 | |
|
1817 | 1817 | ``showtime`` |
|
1818 | 1818 | Show time taken as absolute durations, in addition to percentages. |
|
1819 | 1819 | Only used by the ``hotpath`` format. |
|
1820 | 1820 | (default: true) |
|
1821 | 1821 | |
|
1822 | 1822 | ``progress`` |
|
1823 | 1823 | ------------ |
|
1824 | 1824 | |
|
1825 | 1825 | Mercurial commands can draw progress bars that are as informative as |
|
1826 | 1826 | possible. Some progress bars only offer indeterminate information, while others |
|
1827 | 1827 | have a definite end point. |
|
1828 | 1828 | |
|
1829 | 1829 | ``debug`` |
|
1830 | 1830 | Whether to print debug info when updating the progress bar. (default: False) |
|
1831 | 1831 | |
|
1832 | 1832 | ``delay`` |
|
1833 | 1833 | Number of seconds (float) before showing the progress bar. (default: 3) |
|
1834 | 1834 | |
|
1835 | 1835 | ``changedelay`` |
|
1836 | 1836 | Minimum delay before showing a new topic. When set to less than 3 * refresh, |
|
1837 | 1837 | that value will be used instead. (default: 1) |
|
1838 | 1838 | |
|
1839 | 1839 | ``estimateinterval`` |
|
1840 | 1840 | Maximum sampling interval in seconds for speed and estimated time |
|
1841 | 1841 | calculation. (default: 60) |
|
1842 | 1842 | |
|
1843 | 1843 | ``refresh`` |
|
1844 | 1844 | Time in seconds between refreshes of the progress bar. (default: 0.1) |
|
1845 | 1845 | |
|
1846 | 1846 | ``format`` |
|
1847 | 1847 | Format of the progress bar. |
|
1848 | 1848 | |
|
1849 | 1849 | Valid entries for the format field are ``topic``, ``bar``, ``number``, |
|
1850 | 1850 | ``unit``, ``estimate``, ``speed``, and ``item``. ``item`` defaults to the |
|
1851 | 1851 | last 20 characters of the item, but this can be changed by adding either |
|
1852 | 1852 | ``-<num>`` which would take the last num characters, or ``+<num>`` for the |
|
1853 | 1853 | first num characters. |
|
1854 | 1854 | |
|
1855 | 1855 | (default: topic bar number estimate) |
|
1856 | 1856 | |
|
1857 | 1857 | ``width`` |
|
1858 | 1858 | If set, the maximum width of the progress information (that is, min(width, |
|
1859 | 1859 | term width) will be used). |
|
1860 | 1860 | |
|
1861 | 1861 | ``clear-complete`` |
|
1862 | 1862 | Clear the progress bar after it's done. (default: True) |
|
1863 | 1863 | |
|
1864 | 1864 | ``disable`` |
|
1865 | 1865 | If true, don't show a progress bar. |
|
1866 | 1866 | |
|
1867 | 1867 | ``assume-tty`` |
|
1868 | 1868 | If true, ALWAYS show a progress bar, unless disable is given. |
|
1869 | 1869 | |
|
1870 | 1870 | ``rebase`` |
|
1871 | 1871 | ---------- |
|
1872 | 1872 | |
|
1873 | 1873 | ``evolution.allowdivergence`` |
|
1874 | 1874 | Default to False, when True allow creating divergence when performing |
|
1875 | 1875 | rebase of obsolete changesets. |
|
1876 | 1876 | |
|
1877 | 1877 | ``revsetalias`` |
|
1878 | 1878 | --------------- |
|
1879 | 1879 | |
|
1880 | 1880 | Alias definitions for revsets. See :hg:`help revsets` for details. |
|
1881 | 1881 | |
|
1882 | 1882 | ``rewrite`` |
|
1883 | 1883 | ----------- |
|
1884 | 1884 | |
|
1885 | 1885 | ``backup-bundle`` |
|
1886 | 1886 | Whether to save stripped changesets to a bundle file. (default: True) |
|
1887 | 1887 | |
|
1888 | 1888 | ``update-timestamp`` |
|
1889 | 1889 | If true, updates the date and time of the changeset to current. It is only |
|
1890 | 1890 | applicable for `hg amend`, `hg commit --amend` and `hg uncommit` in the |
|
1891 | 1891 | current version. |
|
1892 | 1892 | |
|
1893 | 1893 | ``empty-successor`` |
|
1894 | 1894 | |
|
1895 | 1895 | Control what happens with empty successors that are the result of rewrite |
|
1896 | 1896 | operations. If set to ``skip``, the successor is not created. If set to |
|
1897 | 1897 | ``keep``, the empty successor is created and kept. |
|
1898 | 1898 | |
|
1899 |
Currently, |
|
|
1899 | Currently, only the rebase command considers this configuration. | |
|
1900 | (EXPERIMENTAL) | |
|
1900 | 1901 | |
|
1901 | 1902 | ``storage`` |
|
1902 | 1903 | ----------- |
|
1903 | 1904 | |
|
1904 | 1905 | Control the strategy Mercurial uses internally to store history. Options in this |
|
1905 | 1906 | category impact performance and repository size. |
|
1906 | 1907 | |
|
1907 | 1908 | ``revlog.optimize-delta-parent-choice`` |
|
1908 | 1909 | When storing a merge revision, both parents will be equally considered as |
|
1909 | 1910 | a possible delta base. This results in better delta selection and improved |
|
1910 | 1911 | revlog compression. This option is enabled by default. |
|
1911 | 1912 | |
|
1912 | 1913 | Turning this option off can result in large increase of repository size for |
|
1913 | 1914 | repository with many merges. |
|
1914 | 1915 | |
|
1915 | 1916 | ``revlog.reuse-external-delta-parent`` |
|
1916 | 1917 | Control the order in which delta parents are considered when adding new |
|
1917 | 1918 | revisions from an external source. |
|
1918 | 1919 | (typically: apply bundle from `hg pull` or `hg push`). |
|
1919 | 1920 | |
|
1920 | 1921 | New revisions are usually provided as a delta against other revisions. By |
|
1921 | 1922 | default, Mercurial will try to reuse this delta first, therefore using the |
|
1922 | 1923 | same "delta parent" as the source. Directly using delta's from the source |
|
1923 | 1924 | reduces CPU usage and usually speeds up operation. However, in some case, |
|
1924 | 1925 | the source might have sub-optimal delta bases and forcing their reevaluation |
|
1925 | 1926 | is useful. For example, pushes from an old client could have sub-optimal |
|
1926 | 1927 | delta's parent that the server want to optimize. (lack of general delta, bad |
|
1927 | 1928 | parents, choice, lack of sparse-revlog, etc). |
|
1928 | 1929 | |
|
1929 | 1930 | This option is enabled by default. Turning it off will ensure bad delta |
|
1930 | 1931 | parent choices from older client do not propagate to this repository, at |
|
1931 | 1932 | the cost of a small increase in CPU consumption. |
|
1932 | 1933 | |
|
1933 | 1934 | Note: this option only control the order in which delta parents are |
|
1934 | 1935 | considered. Even when disabled, the existing delta from the source will be |
|
1935 | 1936 | reused if the same delta parent is selected. |
|
1936 | 1937 | |
|
1937 | 1938 | ``revlog.reuse-external-delta`` |
|
1938 | 1939 | Control the reuse of delta from external source. |
|
1939 | 1940 | (typically: apply bundle from `hg pull` or `hg push`). |
|
1940 | 1941 | |
|
1941 | 1942 | New revisions are usually provided as a delta against another revision. By |
|
1942 | 1943 | default, Mercurial will not recompute the same delta again, trusting |
|
1943 | 1944 | externally provided deltas. There have been rare cases of small adjustment |
|
1944 | 1945 | to the diffing algorithm in the past. So in some rare case, recomputing |
|
1945 | 1946 | delta provided by ancient clients can provides better results. Disabling |
|
1946 | 1947 | this option means going through a full delta recomputation for all incoming |
|
1947 | 1948 | revisions. It means a large increase in CPU usage and will slow operations |
|
1948 | 1949 | down. |
|
1949 | 1950 | |
|
1950 | 1951 | This option is enabled by default. When disabled, it also disables the |
|
1951 | 1952 | related ``storage.revlog.reuse-external-delta-parent`` option. |
|
1952 | 1953 | |
|
1953 | 1954 | ``revlog.zlib.level`` |
|
1954 | 1955 | Zlib compression level used when storing data into the repository. Accepted |
|
1955 | 1956 | Value range from 1 (lowest compression) to 9 (highest compression). Zlib |
|
1956 | 1957 | default value is 6. |
|
1957 | 1958 | |
|
1958 | 1959 | |
|
1959 | 1960 | ``revlog.zstd.level`` |
|
1960 | 1961 | zstd compression level used when storing data into the repository. Accepted |
|
1961 | 1962 | Value range from 1 (lowest compression) to 22 (highest compression). |
|
1962 | 1963 | (default 3) |
|
1963 | 1964 | |
|
1964 | 1965 | ``server`` |
|
1965 | 1966 | ---------- |
|
1966 | 1967 | |
|
1967 | 1968 | Controls generic server settings. |
|
1968 | 1969 | |
|
1969 | 1970 | ``bookmarks-pushkey-compat`` |
|
1970 | 1971 | Trigger pushkey hook when being pushed bookmark updates. This config exist |
|
1971 | 1972 | for compatibility purpose (default to True) |
|
1972 | 1973 | |
|
1973 | 1974 | If you use ``pushkey`` and ``pre-pushkey`` hooks to control bookmark |
|
1974 | 1975 | movement we recommend you migrate them to ``txnclose-bookmark`` and |
|
1975 | 1976 | ``pretxnclose-bookmark``. |
|
1976 | 1977 | |
|
1977 | 1978 | ``compressionengines`` |
|
1978 | 1979 | List of compression engines and their relative priority to advertise |
|
1979 | 1980 | to clients. |
|
1980 | 1981 | |
|
1981 | 1982 | The order of compression engines determines their priority, the first |
|
1982 | 1983 | having the highest priority. If a compression engine is not listed |
|
1983 | 1984 | here, it won't be advertised to clients. |
|
1984 | 1985 | |
|
1985 | 1986 | If not set (the default), built-in defaults are used. Run |
|
1986 | 1987 | :hg:`debuginstall` to list available compression engines and their |
|
1987 | 1988 | default wire protocol priority. |
|
1988 | 1989 | |
|
1989 | 1990 | Older Mercurial clients only support zlib compression and this setting |
|
1990 | 1991 | has no effect for legacy clients. |
|
1991 | 1992 | |
|
1992 | 1993 | ``uncompressed`` |
|
1993 | 1994 | Whether to allow clients to clone a repository using the |
|
1994 | 1995 | uncompressed streaming protocol. This transfers about 40% more |
|
1995 | 1996 | data than a regular clone, but uses less memory and CPU on both |
|
1996 | 1997 | server and client. Over a LAN (100 Mbps or better) or a very fast |
|
1997 | 1998 | WAN, an uncompressed streaming clone is a lot faster (~10x) than a |
|
1998 | 1999 | regular clone. Over most WAN connections (anything slower than |
|
1999 | 2000 | about 6 Mbps), uncompressed streaming is slower, because of the |
|
2000 | 2001 | extra data transfer overhead. This mode will also temporarily hold |
|
2001 | 2002 | the write lock while determining what data to transfer. |
|
2002 | 2003 | (default: True) |
|
2003 | 2004 | |
|
2004 | 2005 | ``uncompressedallowsecret`` |
|
2005 | 2006 | Whether to allow stream clones when the repository contains secret |
|
2006 | 2007 | changesets. (default: False) |
|
2007 | 2008 | |
|
2008 | 2009 | ``preferuncompressed`` |
|
2009 | 2010 | When set, clients will try to use the uncompressed streaming |
|
2010 | 2011 | protocol. (default: False) |
|
2011 | 2012 | |
|
2012 | 2013 | ``disablefullbundle`` |
|
2013 | 2014 | When set, servers will refuse attempts to do pull-based clones. |
|
2014 | 2015 | If this option is set, ``preferuncompressed`` and/or clone bundles |
|
2015 | 2016 | are highly recommended. Partial clones will still be allowed. |
|
2016 | 2017 | (default: False) |
|
2017 | 2018 | |
|
2018 | 2019 | ``streamunbundle`` |
|
2019 | 2020 | When set, servers will apply data sent from the client directly, |
|
2020 | 2021 | otherwise it will be written to a temporary file first. This option |
|
2021 | 2022 | effectively prevents concurrent pushes. |
|
2022 | 2023 | |
|
2023 | 2024 | ``pullbundle`` |
|
2024 | 2025 | When set, the server will check pullbundle.manifest for bundles |
|
2025 | 2026 | covering the requested heads and common nodes. The first matching |
|
2026 | 2027 | entry will be streamed to the client. |
|
2027 | 2028 | |
|
2028 | 2029 | For HTTP transport, the stream will still use zlib compression |
|
2029 | 2030 | for older clients. |
|
2030 | 2031 | |
|
2031 | 2032 | ``concurrent-push-mode`` |
|
2032 | 2033 | Level of allowed race condition between two pushing clients. |
|
2033 | 2034 | |
|
2034 | 2035 | - 'strict': push is abort if another client touched the repository |
|
2035 | 2036 | while the push was preparing. |
|
2036 | 2037 | - 'check-related': push is only aborted if it affects head that got also |
|
2037 | 2038 | affected while the push was preparing. (default since 5.4) |
|
2038 | 2039 | |
|
2039 | 2040 | 'check-related' only takes effect for compatible clients (version |
|
2040 | 2041 | 4.3 and later). Older clients will use 'strict'. |
|
2041 | 2042 | |
|
2042 | 2043 | ``validate`` |
|
2043 | 2044 | Whether to validate the completeness of pushed changesets by |
|
2044 | 2045 | checking that all new file revisions specified in manifests are |
|
2045 | 2046 | present. (default: False) |
|
2046 | 2047 | |
|
2047 | 2048 | ``maxhttpheaderlen`` |
|
2048 | 2049 | Instruct HTTP clients not to send request headers longer than this |
|
2049 | 2050 | many bytes. (default: 1024) |
|
2050 | 2051 | |
|
2051 | 2052 | ``bundle1`` |
|
2052 | 2053 | Whether to allow clients to push and pull using the legacy bundle1 |
|
2053 | 2054 | exchange format. (default: True) |
|
2054 | 2055 | |
|
2055 | 2056 | ``bundle1gd`` |
|
2056 | 2057 | Like ``bundle1`` but only used if the repository is using the |
|
2057 | 2058 | *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True) |
|
2058 | 2059 | |
|
2059 | 2060 | ``bundle1.push`` |
|
2060 | 2061 | Whether to allow clients to push using the legacy bundle1 exchange |
|
2061 | 2062 | format. (default: True) |
|
2062 | 2063 | |
|
2063 | 2064 | ``bundle1gd.push`` |
|
2064 | 2065 | Like ``bundle1.push`` but only used if the repository is using the |
|
2065 | 2066 | *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True) |
|
2066 | 2067 | |
|
2067 | 2068 | ``bundle1.pull`` |
|
2068 | 2069 | Whether to allow clients to pull using the legacy bundle1 exchange |
|
2069 | 2070 | format. (default: True) |
|
2070 | 2071 | |
|
2071 | 2072 | ``bundle1gd.pull`` |
|
2072 | 2073 | Like ``bundle1.pull`` but only used if the repository is using the |
|
2073 | 2074 | *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True) |
|
2074 | 2075 | |
|
2075 | 2076 | Large repositories using the *generaldelta* storage format should |
|
2076 | 2077 | consider setting this option because converting *generaldelta* |
|
2077 | 2078 | repositories to the exchange format required by the bundle1 data |
|
2078 | 2079 | format can consume a lot of CPU. |
|
2079 | 2080 | |
|
2080 | 2081 | ``bundle2.stream`` |
|
2081 | 2082 | Whether to allow clients to pull using the bundle2 streaming protocol. |
|
2082 | 2083 | (default: True) |
|
2083 | 2084 | |
|
2084 | 2085 | ``zliblevel`` |
|
2085 | 2086 | Integer between ``-1`` and ``9`` that controls the zlib compression level |
|
2086 | 2087 | for wire protocol commands that send zlib compressed output (notably the |
|
2087 | 2088 | commands that send repository history data). |
|
2088 | 2089 | |
|
2089 | 2090 | The default (``-1``) uses the default zlib compression level, which is |
|
2090 | 2091 | likely equivalent to ``6``. ``0`` means no compression. ``9`` means |
|
2091 | 2092 | maximum compression. |
|
2092 | 2093 | |
|
2093 | 2094 | Setting this option allows server operators to make trade-offs between |
|
2094 | 2095 | bandwidth and CPU used. Lowering the compression lowers CPU utilization |
|
2095 | 2096 | but sends more bytes to clients. |
|
2096 | 2097 | |
|
2097 | 2098 | This option only impacts the HTTP server. |
|
2098 | 2099 | |
|
2099 | 2100 | ``zstdlevel`` |
|
2100 | 2101 | Integer between ``1`` and ``22`` that controls the zstd compression level |
|
2101 | 2102 | for wire protocol commands. ``1`` is the minimal amount of compression and |
|
2102 | 2103 | ``22`` is the highest amount of compression. |
|
2103 | 2104 | |
|
2104 | 2105 | The default (``3``) should be significantly faster than zlib while likely |
|
2105 | 2106 | delivering better compression ratios. |
|
2106 | 2107 | |
|
2107 | 2108 | This option only impacts the HTTP server. |
|
2108 | 2109 | |
|
2109 | 2110 | See also ``server.zliblevel``. |
|
2110 | 2111 | |
|
2111 | 2112 | ``view`` |
|
2112 | 2113 | Repository filter used when exchanging revisions with the peer. |
|
2113 | 2114 | |
|
2114 | 2115 | The default view (``served``) excludes secret and hidden changesets. |
|
2115 | 2116 | Another useful value is ``immutable`` (no draft, secret or hidden |
|
2116 | 2117 | changesets). (EXPERIMENTAL) |
|
2117 | 2118 | |
|
2118 | 2119 | ``smtp`` |
|
2119 | 2120 | -------- |
|
2120 | 2121 | |
|
2121 | 2122 | Configuration for extensions that need to send email messages. |
|
2122 | 2123 | |
|
2123 | 2124 | ``host`` |
|
2124 | 2125 | Host name of mail server, e.g. "mail.example.com". |
|
2125 | 2126 | |
|
2126 | 2127 | ``port`` |
|
2127 | 2128 | Optional. Port to connect to on mail server. (default: 465 if |
|
2128 | 2129 | ``tls`` is smtps; 25 otherwise) |
|
2129 | 2130 | |
|
2130 | 2131 | ``tls`` |
|
2131 | 2132 | Optional. Method to enable TLS when connecting to mail server: starttls, |
|
2132 | 2133 | smtps or none. (default: none) |
|
2133 | 2134 | |
|
2134 | 2135 | ``username`` |
|
2135 | 2136 | Optional. User name for authenticating with the SMTP server. |
|
2136 | 2137 | (default: None) |
|
2137 | 2138 | |
|
2138 | 2139 | ``password`` |
|
2139 | 2140 | Optional. Password for authenticating with the SMTP server. If not |
|
2140 | 2141 | specified, interactive sessions will prompt the user for a |
|
2141 | 2142 | password; non-interactive sessions will fail. (default: None) |
|
2142 | 2143 | |
|
2143 | 2144 | ``local_hostname`` |
|
2144 | 2145 | Optional. The hostname that the sender can use to identify |
|
2145 | 2146 | itself to the MTA. |
|
2146 | 2147 | |
|
2147 | 2148 | |
|
2148 | 2149 | ``subpaths`` |
|
2149 | 2150 | ------------ |
|
2150 | 2151 | |
|
2151 | 2152 | Subrepository source URLs can go stale if a remote server changes name |
|
2152 | 2153 | or becomes temporarily unavailable. This section lets you define |
|
2153 | 2154 | rewrite rules of the form:: |
|
2154 | 2155 | |
|
2155 | 2156 | <pattern> = <replacement> |
|
2156 | 2157 | |
|
2157 | 2158 | where ``pattern`` is a regular expression matching a subrepository |
|
2158 | 2159 | source URL and ``replacement`` is the replacement string used to |
|
2159 | 2160 | rewrite it. Groups can be matched in ``pattern`` and referenced in |
|
2160 | 2161 | ``replacements``. For instance:: |
|
2161 | 2162 | |
|
2162 | 2163 | http://server/(.*)-hg/ = http://hg.server/\1/ |
|
2163 | 2164 | |
|
2164 | 2165 | rewrites ``http://server/foo-hg/`` into ``http://hg.server/foo/``. |
|
2165 | 2166 | |
|
2166 | 2167 | Relative subrepository paths are first made absolute, and the |
|
2167 | 2168 | rewrite rules are then applied on the full (absolute) path. If ``pattern`` |
|
2168 | 2169 | doesn't match the full path, an attempt is made to apply it on the |
|
2169 | 2170 | relative path alone. The rules are applied in definition order. |
|
2170 | 2171 | |
|
2171 | 2172 | ``subrepos`` |
|
2172 | 2173 | ------------ |
|
2173 | 2174 | |
|
2174 | 2175 | This section contains options that control the behavior of the |
|
2175 | 2176 | subrepositories feature. See also :hg:`help subrepos`. |
|
2176 | 2177 | |
|
2177 | 2178 | Security note: auditing in Mercurial is known to be insufficient to |
|
2178 | 2179 | prevent clone-time code execution with carefully constructed Git |
|
2179 | 2180 | subrepos. It is unknown if a similar detect is present in Subversion |
|
2180 | 2181 | subrepos. Both Git and Subversion subrepos are disabled by default |
|
2181 | 2182 | out of security concerns. These subrepo types can be enabled using |
|
2182 | 2183 | the respective options below. |
|
2183 | 2184 | |
|
2184 | 2185 | ``allowed`` |
|
2185 | 2186 | Whether subrepositories are allowed in the working directory. |
|
2186 | 2187 | |
|
2187 | 2188 | When false, commands involving subrepositories (like :hg:`update`) |
|
2188 | 2189 | will fail for all subrepository types. |
|
2189 | 2190 | (default: true) |
|
2190 | 2191 | |
|
2191 | 2192 | ``hg:allowed`` |
|
2192 | 2193 | Whether Mercurial subrepositories are allowed in the working |
|
2193 | 2194 | directory. This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed`` |
|
2194 | 2195 | is true. |
|
2195 | 2196 | (default: true) |
|
2196 | 2197 | |
|
2197 | 2198 | ``git:allowed`` |
|
2198 | 2199 | Whether Git subrepositories are allowed in the working directory. |
|
2199 | 2200 | This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed`` is true. |
|
2200 | 2201 | |
|
2201 | 2202 | See the security note above before enabling Git subrepos. |
|
2202 | 2203 | (default: false) |
|
2203 | 2204 | |
|
2204 | 2205 | ``svn:allowed`` |
|
2205 | 2206 | Whether Subversion subrepositories are allowed in the working |
|
2206 | 2207 | directory. This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed`` |
|
2207 | 2208 | is true. |
|
2208 | 2209 | |
|
2209 | 2210 | See the security note above before enabling Subversion subrepos. |
|
2210 | 2211 | (default: false) |
|
2211 | 2212 | |
|
2212 | 2213 | ``templatealias`` |
|
2213 | 2214 | ----------------- |
|
2214 | 2215 | |
|
2215 | 2216 | Alias definitions for templates. See :hg:`help templates` for details. |
|
2216 | 2217 | |
|
2217 | 2218 | ``templates`` |
|
2218 | 2219 | ------------- |
|
2219 | 2220 | |
|
2220 | 2221 | Use the ``[templates]`` section to define template strings. |
|
2221 | 2222 | See :hg:`help templates` for details. |
|
2222 | 2223 | |
|
2223 | 2224 | ``trusted`` |
|
2224 | 2225 | ----------- |
|
2225 | 2226 | |
|
2226 | 2227 | Mercurial will not use the settings in the |
|
2227 | 2228 | ``.hg/hgrc`` file from a repository if it doesn't belong to a trusted |
|
2228 | 2229 | user or to a trusted group, as various hgrc features allow arbitrary |
|
2229 | 2230 | commands to be run. This issue is often encountered when configuring |
|
2230 | 2231 | hooks or extensions for shared repositories or servers. However, |
|
2231 | 2232 | the web interface will use some safe settings from the ``[web]`` |
|
2232 | 2233 | section. |
|
2233 | 2234 | |
|
2234 | 2235 | This section specifies what users and groups are trusted. The |
|
2235 | 2236 | current user is always trusted. To trust everybody, list a user or a |
|
2236 | 2237 | group with name ``*``. These settings must be placed in an |
|
2237 | 2238 | *already-trusted file* to take effect, such as ``$HOME/.hgrc`` of the |
|
2238 | 2239 | user or service running Mercurial. |
|
2239 | 2240 | |
|
2240 | 2241 | ``users`` |
|
2241 | 2242 | Comma-separated list of trusted users. |
|
2242 | 2243 | |
|
2243 | 2244 | ``groups`` |
|
2244 | 2245 | Comma-separated list of trusted groups. |
|
2245 | 2246 | |
|
2246 | 2247 | |
|
2247 | 2248 | ``ui`` |
|
2248 | 2249 | ------ |
|
2249 | 2250 | |
|
2250 | 2251 | User interface controls. |
|
2251 | 2252 | |
|
2252 | 2253 | ``archivemeta`` |
|
2253 | 2254 | Whether to include the .hg_archival.txt file containing meta data |
|
2254 | 2255 | (hashes for the repository base and for tip) in archives created |
|
2255 | 2256 | by the :hg:`archive` command or downloaded via hgweb. |
|
2256 | 2257 | (default: True) |
|
2257 | 2258 | |
|
2258 | 2259 | ``askusername`` |
|
2259 | 2260 | Whether to prompt for a username when committing. If True, and |
|
2260 | 2261 | neither ``$HGUSER`` nor ``$EMAIL`` has been specified, then the user will |
|
2261 | 2262 | be prompted to enter a username. If no username is entered, the |
|
2262 | 2263 | default ``USER@HOST`` is used instead. |
|
2263 | 2264 | (default: False) |
|
2264 | 2265 | |
|
2265 | 2266 | ``clonebundles`` |
|
2266 | 2267 | Whether the "clone bundles" feature is enabled. |
|
2267 | 2268 | |
|
2268 | 2269 | When enabled, :hg:`clone` may download and apply a server-advertised |
|
2269 | 2270 | bundle file from a URL instead of using the normal exchange mechanism. |
|
2270 | 2271 | |
|
2271 | 2272 | This can likely result in faster and more reliable clones. |
|
2272 | 2273 | |
|
2273 | 2274 | (default: True) |
|
2274 | 2275 | |
|
2275 | 2276 | ``clonebundlefallback`` |
|
2276 | 2277 | Whether failure to apply an advertised "clone bundle" from a server |
|
2277 | 2278 | should result in fallback to a regular clone. |
|
2278 | 2279 | |
|
2279 | 2280 | This is disabled by default because servers advertising "clone |
|
2280 | 2281 | bundles" often do so to reduce server load. If advertised bundles |
|
2281 | 2282 | start mass failing and clients automatically fall back to a regular |
|
2282 | 2283 | clone, this would add significant and unexpected load to the server |
|
2283 | 2284 | since the server is expecting clone operations to be offloaded to |
|
2284 | 2285 | pre-generated bundles. Failing fast (the default behavior) ensures |
|
2285 | 2286 | clients don't overwhelm the server when "clone bundle" application |
|
2286 | 2287 | fails. |
|
2287 | 2288 | |
|
2288 | 2289 | (default: False) |
|
2289 | 2290 | |
|
2290 | 2291 | ``clonebundleprefers`` |
|
2291 | 2292 | Defines preferences for which "clone bundles" to use. |
|
2292 | 2293 | |
|
2293 | 2294 | Servers advertising "clone bundles" may advertise multiple available |
|
2294 | 2295 | bundles. Each bundle may have different attributes, such as the bundle |
|
2295 | 2296 | type and compression format. This option is used to prefer a particular |
|
2296 | 2297 | bundle over another. |
|
2297 | 2298 | |
|
2298 | 2299 | The following keys are defined by Mercurial: |
|
2299 | 2300 | |
|
2300 | 2301 | BUNDLESPEC |
|
2301 | 2302 | A bundle type specifier. These are strings passed to :hg:`bundle -t`. |
|
2302 | 2303 | e.g. ``gzip-v2`` or ``bzip2-v1``. |
|
2303 | 2304 | |
|
2304 | 2305 | COMPRESSION |
|
2305 | 2306 | The compression format of the bundle. e.g. ``gzip`` and ``bzip2``. |
|
2306 | 2307 | |
|
2307 | 2308 | Server operators may define custom keys. |
|
2308 | 2309 | |
|
2309 | 2310 | Example values: ``COMPRESSION=bzip2``, |
|
2310 | 2311 | ``BUNDLESPEC=gzip-v2, COMPRESSION=gzip``. |
|
2311 | 2312 | |
|
2312 | 2313 | By default, the first bundle advertised by the server is used. |
|
2313 | 2314 | |
|
2314 | 2315 | ``color`` |
|
2315 | 2316 | When to colorize output. Possible value are Boolean ("yes" or "no"), or |
|
2316 | 2317 | "debug", or "always". (default: "yes"). "yes" will use color whenever it |
|
2317 | 2318 | seems possible. See :hg:`help color` for details. |
|
2318 | 2319 | |
|
2319 | 2320 | ``commitsubrepos`` |
|
2320 | 2321 | Whether to commit modified subrepositories when committing the |
|
2321 | 2322 | parent repository. If False and one subrepository has uncommitted |
|
2322 | 2323 | changes, abort the commit. |
|
2323 | 2324 | (default: False) |
|
2324 | 2325 | |
|
2325 | 2326 | ``debug`` |
|
2326 | 2327 | Print debugging information. (default: False) |
|
2327 | 2328 | |
|
2328 | 2329 | ``editor`` |
|
2329 | 2330 | The editor to use during a commit. (default: ``$EDITOR`` or ``vi``) |
|
2330 | 2331 | |
|
2331 | 2332 | ``fallbackencoding`` |
|
2332 | 2333 | Encoding to try if it's not possible to decode the changelog using |
|
2333 | 2334 | UTF-8. (default: ISO-8859-1) |
|
2334 | 2335 | |
|
2335 | 2336 | ``graphnodetemplate`` |
|
2336 | 2337 | The template used to print changeset nodes in an ASCII revision graph. |
|
2337 | 2338 | (default: ``{graphnode}``) |
|
2338 | 2339 | |
|
2339 | 2340 | ``ignore`` |
|
2340 | 2341 | A file to read per-user ignore patterns from. This file should be |
|
2341 | 2342 | in the same format as a repository-wide .hgignore file. Filenames |
|
2342 | 2343 | are relative to the repository root. This option supports hook syntax, |
|
2343 | 2344 | so if you want to specify multiple ignore files, you can do so by |
|
2344 | 2345 | setting something like ``ignore.other = ~/.hgignore2``. For details |
|
2345 | 2346 | of the ignore file format, see the ``hgignore(5)`` man page. |
|
2346 | 2347 | |
|
2347 | 2348 | ``interactive`` |
|
2348 | 2349 | Allow to prompt the user. (default: True) |
|
2349 | 2350 | |
|
2350 | 2351 | ``interface`` |
|
2351 | 2352 | Select the default interface for interactive features (default: text). |
|
2352 | 2353 | Possible values are 'text' and 'curses'. |
|
2353 | 2354 | |
|
2354 | 2355 | ``interface.chunkselector`` |
|
2355 | 2356 | Select the interface for change recording (e.g. :hg:`commit -i`). |
|
2356 | 2357 | Possible values are 'text' and 'curses'. |
|
2357 | 2358 | This config overrides the interface specified by ui.interface. |
|
2358 | 2359 | |
|
2359 | 2360 | ``large-file-limit`` |
|
2360 | 2361 | Largest file size that gives no memory use warning. |
|
2361 | 2362 | Possible values are integers or 0 to disable the check. |
|
2362 | 2363 | (default: 10000000) |
|
2363 | 2364 | |
|
2364 | 2365 | ``logtemplate`` |
|
2365 | 2366 | Template string for commands that print changesets. |
|
2366 | 2367 | |
|
2367 | 2368 | ``merge`` |
|
2368 | 2369 | The conflict resolution program to use during a manual merge. |
|
2369 | 2370 | For more information on merge tools see :hg:`help merge-tools`. |
|
2370 | 2371 | For configuring merge tools see the ``[merge-tools]`` section. |
|
2371 | 2372 | |
|
2372 | 2373 | ``mergemarkers`` |
|
2373 | 2374 | Sets the merge conflict marker label styling. The ``detailed`` |
|
2374 | 2375 | style uses the ``mergemarkertemplate`` setting to style the labels. |
|
2375 | 2376 | The ``basic`` style just uses 'local' and 'other' as the marker label. |
|
2376 | 2377 | One of ``basic`` or ``detailed``. |
|
2377 | 2378 | (default: ``basic``) |
|
2378 | 2379 | |
|
2379 | 2380 | ``mergemarkertemplate`` |
|
2380 | 2381 | The template used to print the commit description next to each conflict |
|
2381 | 2382 | marker during merge conflicts. See :hg:`help templates` for the template |
|
2382 | 2383 | format. |
|
2383 | 2384 | |
|
2384 | 2385 | Defaults to showing the hash, tags, branches, bookmarks, author, and |
|
2385 | 2386 | the first line of the commit description. |
|
2386 | 2387 | |
|
2387 | 2388 | If you use non-ASCII characters in names for tags, branches, bookmarks, |
|
2388 | 2389 | authors, and/or commit descriptions, you must pay attention to encodings of |
|
2389 | 2390 | managed files. At template expansion, non-ASCII characters use the encoding |
|
2390 | 2391 | specified by the ``--encoding`` global option, ``HGENCODING`` or other |
|
2391 | 2392 | environment variables that govern your locale. If the encoding of the merge |
|
2392 | 2393 | markers is different from the encoding of the merged files, |
|
2393 | 2394 | serious problems may occur. |
|
2394 | 2395 | |
|
2395 | 2396 | Can be overridden per-merge-tool, see the ``[merge-tools]`` section. |
|
2396 | 2397 | |
|
2397 | 2398 | ``message-output`` |
|
2398 | 2399 | Where to write status and error messages. (default: ``stdio``) |
|
2399 | 2400 | |
|
2400 | 2401 | ``channel`` |
|
2401 | 2402 | Use separate channel for structured output. (Command-server only) |
|
2402 | 2403 | ``stderr`` |
|
2403 | 2404 | Everything to stderr. |
|
2404 | 2405 | ``stdio`` |
|
2405 | 2406 | Status to stdout, and error to stderr. |
|
2406 | 2407 | |
|
2407 | 2408 | ``origbackuppath`` |
|
2408 | 2409 | The path to a directory used to store generated .orig files. If the path is |
|
2409 | 2410 | not a directory, one will be created. If set, files stored in this |
|
2410 | 2411 | directory have the same name as the original file and do not have a .orig |
|
2411 | 2412 | suffix. |
|
2412 | 2413 | |
|
2413 | 2414 | ``paginate`` |
|
2414 | 2415 | Control the pagination of command output (default: True). See :hg:`help pager` |
|
2415 | 2416 | for details. |
|
2416 | 2417 | |
|
2417 | 2418 | ``patch`` |
|
2418 | 2419 | An optional external tool that ``hg import`` and some extensions |
|
2419 | 2420 | will use for applying patches. By default Mercurial uses an |
|
2420 | 2421 | internal patch utility. The external tool must work as the common |
|
2421 | 2422 | Unix ``patch`` program. In particular, it must accept a ``-p`` |
|
2422 | 2423 | argument to strip patch headers, a ``-d`` argument to specify the |
|
2423 | 2424 | current directory, a file name to patch, and a patch file to take |
|
2424 | 2425 | from stdin. |
|
2425 | 2426 | |
|
2426 | 2427 | It is possible to specify a patch tool together with extra |
|
2427 | 2428 | arguments. For example, setting this option to ``patch --merge`` |
|
2428 | 2429 | will use the ``patch`` program with its 2-way merge option. |
|
2429 | 2430 | |
|
2430 | 2431 | ``portablefilenames`` |
|
2431 | 2432 | Check for portable filenames. Can be ``warn``, ``ignore`` or ``abort``. |
|
2432 | 2433 | (default: ``warn``) |
|
2433 | 2434 | |
|
2434 | 2435 | ``warn`` |
|
2435 | 2436 | Print a warning message on POSIX platforms, if a file with a non-portable |
|
2436 | 2437 | filename is added (e.g. a file with a name that can't be created on |
|
2437 | 2438 | Windows because it contains reserved parts like ``AUX``, reserved |
|
2438 | 2439 | characters like ``:``, or would cause a case collision with an existing |
|
2439 | 2440 | file). |
|
2440 | 2441 | |
|
2441 | 2442 | ``ignore`` |
|
2442 | 2443 | Don't print a warning. |
|
2443 | 2444 | |
|
2444 | 2445 | ``abort`` |
|
2445 | 2446 | The command is aborted. |
|
2446 | 2447 | |
|
2447 | 2448 | ``true`` |
|
2448 | 2449 | Alias for ``warn``. |
|
2449 | 2450 | |
|
2450 | 2451 | ``false`` |
|
2451 | 2452 | Alias for ``ignore``. |
|
2452 | 2453 | |
|
2453 | 2454 | .. container:: windows |
|
2454 | 2455 | |
|
2455 | 2456 | On Windows, this configuration option is ignored and the command aborted. |
|
2456 | 2457 | |
|
2457 | 2458 | ``pre-merge-tool-output-template`` |
|
2458 | 2459 | A template that is printed before executing an external merge tool. This can |
|
2459 | 2460 | be used to print out additional context that might be useful to have during |
|
2460 | 2461 | the conflict resolution, such as the description of the various commits |
|
2461 | 2462 | involved or bookmarks/tags. |
|
2462 | 2463 | |
|
2463 | 2464 | Additional information is available in the ``local`, ``base``, and ``other`` |
|
2464 | 2465 | dicts. For example: ``{local.label}``, ``{base.name}``, or |
|
2465 | 2466 | ``{other.islink}``. |
|
2466 | 2467 | |
|
2467 | 2468 | ``quiet`` |
|
2468 | 2469 | Reduce the amount of output printed. |
|
2469 | 2470 | (default: False) |
|
2470 | 2471 | |
|
2471 | 2472 | ``relative-paths`` |
|
2472 | 2473 | Prefer relative paths in the UI. |
|
2473 | 2474 | |
|
2474 | 2475 | ``remotecmd`` |
|
2475 | 2476 | Remote command to use for clone/push/pull operations. |
|
2476 | 2477 | (default: ``hg``) |
|
2477 | 2478 | |
|
2478 | 2479 | ``report_untrusted`` |
|
2479 | 2480 | Warn if a ``.hg/hgrc`` file is ignored due to not being owned by a |
|
2480 | 2481 | trusted user or group. |
|
2481 | 2482 | (default: True) |
|
2482 | 2483 | |
|
2483 | 2484 | ``slash`` |
|
2484 | 2485 | (Deprecated. Use ``slashpath`` template filter instead.) |
|
2485 | 2486 | |
|
2486 | 2487 | Display paths using a slash (``/``) as the path separator. This |
|
2487 | 2488 | only makes a difference on systems where the default path |
|
2488 | 2489 | separator is not the slash character (e.g. Windows uses the |
|
2489 | 2490 | backslash character (``\``)). |
|
2490 | 2491 | (default: False) |
|
2491 | 2492 | |
|
2492 | 2493 | ``statuscopies`` |
|
2493 | 2494 | Display copies in the status command. |
|
2494 | 2495 | |
|
2495 | 2496 | ``ssh`` |
|
2496 | 2497 | Command to use for SSH connections. (default: ``ssh``) |
|
2497 | 2498 | |
|
2498 | 2499 | ``ssherrorhint`` |
|
2499 | 2500 | A hint shown to the user in the case of SSH error (e.g. |
|
2500 | 2501 | ``Please see http://company/internalwiki/ssh.html``) |
|
2501 | 2502 | |
|
2502 | 2503 | ``strict`` |
|
2503 | 2504 | Require exact command names, instead of allowing unambiguous |
|
2504 | 2505 | abbreviations. (default: False) |
|
2505 | 2506 | |
|
2506 | 2507 | ``style`` |
|
2507 | 2508 | Name of style to use for command output. |
|
2508 | 2509 | |
|
2509 | 2510 | ``supportcontact`` |
|
2510 | 2511 | A URL where users should report a Mercurial traceback. Use this if you are a |
|
2511 | 2512 | large organisation with its own Mercurial deployment process and crash |
|
2512 | 2513 | reports should be addressed to your internal support. |
|
2513 | 2514 | |
|
2514 | 2515 | ``textwidth`` |
|
2515 | 2516 | Maximum width of help text. A longer line generated by ``hg help`` or |
|
2516 | 2517 | ``hg subcommand --help`` will be broken after white space to get this |
|
2517 | 2518 | width or the terminal width, whichever comes first. |
|
2518 | 2519 | A non-positive value will disable this and the terminal width will be |
|
2519 | 2520 | used. (default: 78) |
|
2520 | 2521 | |
|
2521 | 2522 | ``timeout`` |
|
2522 | 2523 | The timeout used when a lock is held (in seconds), a negative value |
|
2523 | 2524 | means no timeout. (default: 600) |
|
2524 | 2525 | |
|
2525 | 2526 | ``timeout.warn`` |
|
2526 | 2527 | Time (in seconds) before a warning is printed about held lock. A negative |
|
2527 | 2528 | value means no warning. (default: 0) |
|
2528 | 2529 | |
|
2529 | 2530 | ``traceback`` |
|
2530 | 2531 | Mercurial always prints a traceback when an unknown exception |
|
2531 | 2532 | occurs. Setting this to True will make Mercurial print a traceback |
|
2532 | 2533 | on all exceptions, even those recognized by Mercurial (such as |
|
2533 | 2534 | IOError or MemoryError). (default: False) |
|
2534 | 2535 | |
|
2535 | 2536 | ``tweakdefaults`` |
|
2536 | 2537 | |
|
2537 | 2538 | By default Mercurial's behavior changes very little from release |
|
2538 | 2539 | to release, but over time the recommended config settings |
|
2539 | 2540 | shift. Enable this config to opt in to get automatic tweaks to |
|
2540 | 2541 | Mercurial's behavior over time. This config setting will have no |
|
2541 | 2542 | effect if ``HGPLAIN`` is set or ``HGPLAINEXCEPT`` is set and does |
|
2542 | 2543 | not include ``tweakdefaults``. (default: False) |
|
2543 | 2544 | |
|
2544 | 2545 | It currently means:: |
|
2545 | 2546 | |
|
2546 | 2547 | .. tweakdefaultsmarker |
|
2547 | 2548 | |
|
2548 | 2549 | ``username`` |
|
2549 | 2550 | The committer of a changeset created when running "commit". |
|
2550 | 2551 | Typically a person's name and email address, e.g. ``Fred Widget |
|
2551 | 2552 | <fred@example.com>``. Environment variables in the |
|
2552 | 2553 | username are expanded. |
|
2553 | 2554 | |
|
2554 | 2555 | (default: ``$EMAIL`` or ``username@hostname``. If the username in |
|
2555 | 2556 | hgrc is empty, e.g. if the system admin set ``username =`` in the |
|
2556 | 2557 | system hgrc, it has to be specified manually or in a different |
|
2557 | 2558 | hgrc file) |
|
2558 | 2559 | |
|
2559 | 2560 | ``verbose`` |
|
2560 | 2561 | Increase the amount of output printed. (default: False) |
|
2561 | 2562 | |
|
2562 | 2563 | |
|
2563 | 2564 | ``web`` |
|
2564 | 2565 | ------- |
|
2565 | 2566 | |
|
2566 | 2567 | Web interface configuration. The settings in this section apply to |
|
2567 | 2568 | both the builtin webserver (started by :hg:`serve`) and the script you |
|
2568 | 2569 | run through a webserver (``hgweb.cgi`` and the derivatives for FastCGI |
|
2569 | 2570 | and WSGI). |
|
2570 | 2571 | |
|
2571 | 2572 | The Mercurial webserver does no authentication (it does not prompt for |
|
2572 | 2573 | usernames and passwords to validate *who* users are), but it does do |
|
2573 | 2574 | authorization (it grants or denies access for *authenticated users* |
|
2574 | 2575 | based on settings in this section). You must either configure your |
|
2575 | 2576 | webserver to do authentication for you, or disable the authorization |
|
2576 | 2577 | checks. |
|
2577 | 2578 | |
|
2578 | 2579 | For a quick setup in a trusted environment, e.g., a private LAN, where |
|
2579 | 2580 | you want it to accept pushes from anybody, you can use the following |
|
2580 | 2581 | command line:: |
|
2581 | 2582 | |
|
2582 | 2583 | $ hg --config web.allow-push=* --config web.push_ssl=False serve |
|
2583 | 2584 | |
|
2584 | 2585 | Note that this will allow anybody to push anything to the server and |
|
2585 | 2586 | that this should not be used for public servers. |
|
2586 | 2587 | |
|
2587 | 2588 | The full set of options is: |
|
2588 | 2589 | |
|
2589 | 2590 | ``accesslog`` |
|
2590 | 2591 | Where to output the access log. (default: stdout) |
|
2591 | 2592 | |
|
2592 | 2593 | ``address`` |
|
2593 | 2594 | Interface address to bind to. (default: all) |
|
2594 | 2595 | |
|
2595 | 2596 | ``allow-archive`` |
|
2596 | 2597 | List of archive format (bz2, gz, zip) allowed for downloading. |
|
2597 | 2598 | (default: empty) |
|
2598 | 2599 | |
|
2599 | 2600 | ``allowbz2`` |
|
2600 | 2601 | (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .tar.bz2 downloading of repository |
|
2601 | 2602 | revisions. |
|
2602 | 2603 | (default: False) |
|
2603 | 2604 | |
|
2604 | 2605 | ``allowgz`` |
|
2605 | 2606 | (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .tar.gz downloading of repository |
|
2606 | 2607 | revisions. |
|
2607 | 2608 | (default: False) |
|
2608 | 2609 | |
|
2609 | 2610 | ``allow-pull`` |
|
2610 | 2611 | Whether to allow pulling from the repository. (default: True) |
|
2611 | 2612 | |
|
2612 | 2613 | ``allow-push`` |
|
2613 | 2614 | Whether to allow pushing to the repository. If empty or not set, |
|
2614 | 2615 | pushing is not allowed. If the special value ``*``, any remote |
|
2615 | 2616 | user can push, including unauthenticated users. Otherwise, the |
|
2616 | 2617 | remote user must have been authenticated, and the authenticated |
|
2617 | 2618 | user name must be present in this list. The contents of the |
|
2618 | 2619 | allow-push list are examined after the deny_push list. |
|
2619 | 2620 | |
|
2620 | 2621 | ``allow_read`` |
|
2621 | 2622 | If the user has not already been denied repository access due to |
|
2622 | 2623 | the contents of deny_read, this list determines whether to grant |
|
2623 | 2624 | repository access to the user. If this list is not empty, and the |
|
2624 | 2625 | user is unauthenticated or not present in the list, then access is |
|
2625 | 2626 | denied for the user. If the list is empty or not set, then access |
|
2626 | 2627 | is permitted to all users by default. Setting allow_read to the |
|
2627 | 2628 | special value ``*`` is equivalent to it not being set (i.e. access |
|
2628 | 2629 | is permitted to all users). The contents of the allow_read list are |
|
2629 | 2630 | examined after the deny_read list. |
|
2630 | 2631 | |
|
2631 | 2632 | ``allowzip`` |
|
2632 | 2633 | (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .zip downloading of repository |
|
2633 | 2634 | revisions. This feature creates temporary files. |
|
2634 | 2635 | (default: False) |
|
2635 | 2636 | |
|
2636 | 2637 | ``archivesubrepos`` |
|
2637 | 2638 | Whether to recurse into subrepositories when archiving. |
|
2638 | 2639 | (default: False) |
|
2639 | 2640 | |
|
2640 | 2641 | ``baseurl`` |
|
2641 | 2642 | Base URL to use when publishing URLs in other locations, so |
|
2642 | 2643 | third-party tools like email notification hooks can construct |
|
2643 | 2644 | URLs. Example: ``http://hgserver/repos/``. |
|
2644 | 2645 | |
|
2645 | 2646 | ``cacerts`` |
|
2646 | 2647 | Path to file containing a list of PEM encoded certificate |
|
2647 | 2648 | authority certificates. Environment variables and ``~user`` |
|
2648 | 2649 | constructs are expanded in the filename. If specified on the |
|
2649 | 2650 | client, then it will verify the identity of remote HTTPS servers |
|
2650 | 2651 | with these certificates. |
|
2651 | 2652 | |
|
2652 | 2653 | To disable SSL verification temporarily, specify ``--insecure`` from |
|
2653 | 2654 | command line. |
|
2654 | 2655 | |
|
2655 | 2656 | You can use OpenSSL's CA certificate file if your platform has |
|
2656 | 2657 | one. On most Linux systems this will be |
|
2657 | 2658 | ``/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt``. Otherwise you will have to |
|
2658 | 2659 | generate this file manually. The form must be as follows:: |
|
2659 | 2660 | |
|
2660 | 2661 | -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- |
|
2661 | 2662 | ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ... |
|
2662 | 2663 | -----END CERTIFICATE----- |
|
2663 | 2664 | -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- |
|
2664 | 2665 | ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ... |
|
2665 | 2666 | -----END CERTIFICATE----- |
|
2666 | 2667 | |
|
2667 | 2668 | ``cache`` |
|
2668 | 2669 | Whether to support caching in hgweb. (default: True) |
|
2669 | 2670 | |
|
2670 | 2671 | ``certificate`` |
|
2671 | 2672 | Certificate to use when running :hg:`serve`. |
|
2672 | 2673 | |
|
2673 | 2674 | ``collapse`` |
|
2674 | 2675 | With ``descend`` enabled, repositories in subdirectories are shown at |
|
2675 | 2676 | a single level alongside repositories in the current path. With |
|
2676 | 2677 | ``collapse`` also enabled, repositories residing at a deeper level than |
|
2677 | 2678 | the current path are grouped behind navigable directory entries that |
|
2678 | 2679 | lead to the locations of these repositories. In effect, this setting |
|
2679 | 2680 | collapses each collection of repositories found within a subdirectory |
|
2680 | 2681 | into a single entry for that subdirectory. (default: False) |
|
2681 | 2682 | |
|
2682 | 2683 | ``comparisoncontext`` |
|
2683 | 2684 | Number of lines of context to show in side-by-side file comparison. If |
|
2684 | 2685 | negative or the value ``full``, whole files are shown. (default: 5) |
|
2685 | 2686 | |
|
2686 | 2687 | This setting can be overridden by a ``context`` request parameter to the |
|
2687 | 2688 | ``comparison`` command, taking the same values. |
|
2688 | 2689 | |
|
2689 | 2690 | ``contact`` |
|
2690 | 2691 | Name or email address of the person in charge of the repository. |
|
2691 | 2692 | (default: ui.username or ``$EMAIL`` or "unknown" if unset or empty) |
|
2692 | 2693 | |
|
2693 | 2694 | ``csp`` |
|
2694 | 2695 | Send a ``Content-Security-Policy`` HTTP header with this value. |
|
2695 | 2696 | |
|
2696 | 2697 | The value may contain a special string ``%nonce%``, which will be replaced |
|
2697 | 2698 | by a randomly-generated one-time use value. If the value contains |
|
2698 | 2699 | ``%nonce%``, ``web.cache`` will be disabled, as caching undermines the |
|
2699 | 2700 | one-time property of the nonce. This nonce will also be inserted into |
|
2700 | 2701 | ``<script>`` elements containing inline JavaScript. |
|
2701 | 2702 | |
|
2702 | 2703 | Note: lots of HTML content sent by the server is derived from repository |
|
2703 | 2704 | data. Please consider the potential for malicious repository data to |
|
2704 | 2705 | "inject" itself into generated HTML content as part of your security |
|
2705 | 2706 | threat model. |
|
2706 | 2707 | |
|
2707 | 2708 | ``deny_push`` |
|
2708 | 2709 | Whether to deny pushing to the repository. If empty or not set, |
|
2709 | 2710 | push is not denied. If the special value ``*``, all remote users are |
|
2710 | 2711 | denied push. Otherwise, unauthenticated users are all denied, and |
|
2711 | 2712 | any authenticated user name present in this list is also denied. The |
|
2712 | 2713 | contents of the deny_push list are examined before the allow-push list. |
|
2713 | 2714 | |
|
2714 | 2715 | ``deny_read`` |
|
2715 | 2716 | Whether to deny reading/viewing of the repository. If this list is |
|
2716 | 2717 | not empty, unauthenticated users are all denied, and any |
|
2717 | 2718 | authenticated user name present in this list is also denied access to |
|
2718 | 2719 | the repository. If set to the special value ``*``, all remote users |
|
2719 | 2720 | are denied access (rarely needed ;). If deny_read is empty or not set, |
|
2720 | 2721 | the determination of repository access depends on the presence and |
|
2721 | 2722 | content of the allow_read list (see description). If both |
|
2722 | 2723 | deny_read and allow_read are empty or not set, then access is |
|
2723 | 2724 | permitted to all users by default. If the repository is being |
|
2724 | 2725 | served via hgwebdir, denied users will not be able to see it in |
|
2725 | 2726 | the list of repositories. The contents of the deny_read list have |
|
2726 | 2727 | priority over (are examined before) the contents of the allow_read |
|
2727 | 2728 | list. |
|
2728 | 2729 | |
|
2729 | 2730 | ``descend`` |
|
2730 | 2731 | hgwebdir indexes will not descend into subdirectories. Only repositories |
|
2731 | 2732 | directly in the current path will be shown (other repositories are still |
|
2732 | 2733 | available from the index corresponding to their containing path). |
|
2733 | 2734 | |
|
2734 | 2735 | ``description`` |
|
2735 | 2736 | Textual description of the repository's purpose or contents. |
|
2736 | 2737 | (default: "unknown") |
|
2737 | 2738 | |
|
2738 | 2739 | ``encoding`` |
|
2739 | 2740 | Character encoding name. (default: the current locale charset) |
|
2740 | 2741 | Example: "UTF-8". |
|
2741 | 2742 | |
|
2742 | 2743 | ``errorlog`` |
|
2743 | 2744 | Where to output the error log. (default: stderr) |
|
2744 | 2745 | |
|
2745 | 2746 | ``guessmime`` |
|
2746 | 2747 | Control MIME types for raw download of file content. |
|
2747 | 2748 | Set to True to let hgweb guess the content type from the file |
|
2748 | 2749 | extension. This will serve HTML files as ``text/html`` and might |
|
2749 | 2750 | allow cross-site scripting attacks when serving untrusted |
|
2750 | 2751 | repositories. (default: False) |
|
2751 | 2752 | |
|
2752 | 2753 | ``hidden`` |
|
2753 | 2754 | Whether to hide the repository in the hgwebdir index. |
|
2754 | 2755 | (default: False) |
|
2755 | 2756 | |
|
2756 | 2757 | ``ipv6`` |
|
2757 | 2758 | Whether to use IPv6. (default: False) |
|
2758 | 2759 | |
|
2759 | 2760 | ``labels`` |
|
2760 | 2761 | List of string *labels* associated with the repository. |
|
2761 | 2762 | |
|
2762 | 2763 | Labels are exposed as a template keyword and can be used to customize |
|
2763 | 2764 | output. e.g. the ``index`` template can group or filter repositories |
|
2764 | 2765 | by labels and the ``summary`` template can display additional content |
|
2765 | 2766 | if a specific label is present. |
|
2766 | 2767 | |
|
2767 | 2768 | ``logoimg`` |
|
2768 | 2769 | File name of the logo image that some templates display on each page. |
|
2769 | 2770 | The file name is relative to ``staticurl``. That is, the full path to |
|
2770 | 2771 | the logo image is "staticurl/logoimg". |
|
2771 | 2772 | If unset, ``hglogo.png`` will be used. |
|
2772 | 2773 | |
|
2773 | 2774 | ``logourl`` |
|
2774 | 2775 | Base URL to use for logos. If unset, ``https://mercurial-scm.org/`` |
|
2775 | 2776 | will be used. |
|
2776 | 2777 | |
|
2777 | 2778 | ``maxchanges`` |
|
2778 | 2779 | Maximum number of changes to list on the changelog. (default: 10) |
|
2779 | 2780 | |
|
2780 | 2781 | ``maxfiles`` |
|
2781 | 2782 | Maximum number of files to list per changeset. (default: 10) |
|
2782 | 2783 | |
|
2783 | 2784 | ``maxshortchanges`` |
|
2784 | 2785 | Maximum number of changes to list on the shortlog, graph or filelog |
|
2785 | 2786 | pages. (default: 60) |
|
2786 | 2787 | |
|
2787 | 2788 | ``name`` |
|
2788 | 2789 | Repository name to use in the web interface. |
|
2789 | 2790 | (default: current working directory) |
|
2790 | 2791 | |
|
2791 | 2792 | ``port`` |
|
2792 | 2793 | Port to listen on. (default: 8000) |
|
2793 | 2794 | |
|
2794 | 2795 | ``prefix`` |
|
2795 | 2796 | Prefix path to serve from. (default: '' (server root)) |
|
2796 | 2797 | |
|
2797 | 2798 | ``push_ssl`` |
|
2798 | 2799 | Whether to require that inbound pushes be transported over SSL to |
|
2799 | 2800 | prevent password sniffing. (default: True) |
|
2800 | 2801 | |
|
2801 | 2802 | ``refreshinterval`` |
|
2802 | 2803 | How frequently directory listings re-scan the filesystem for new |
|
2803 | 2804 | repositories, in seconds. This is relevant when wildcards are used |
|
2804 | 2805 | to define paths. Depending on how much filesystem traversal is |
|
2805 | 2806 | required, refreshing may negatively impact performance. |
|
2806 | 2807 | |
|
2807 | 2808 | Values less than or equal to 0 always refresh. |
|
2808 | 2809 | (default: 20) |
|
2809 | 2810 | |
|
2810 | 2811 | ``server-header`` |
|
2811 | 2812 | Value for HTTP ``Server`` response header. |
|
2812 | 2813 | |
|
2813 | 2814 | ``static`` |
|
2814 | 2815 | Directory where static files are served from. |
|
2815 | 2816 | |
|
2816 | 2817 | ``staticurl`` |
|
2817 | 2818 | Base URL to use for static files. If unset, static files (e.g. the |
|
2818 | 2819 | hgicon.png favicon) will be served by the CGI script itself. Use |
|
2819 | 2820 | this setting to serve them directly with the HTTP server. |
|
2820 | 2821 | Example: ``http://hgserver/static/``. |
|
2821 | 2822 | |
|
2822 | 2823 | ``stripes`` |
|
2823 | 2824 | How many lines a "zebra stripe" should span in multi-line output. |
|
2824 | 2825 | Set to 0 to disable. (default: 1) |
|
2825 | 2826 | |
|
2826 | 2827 | ``style`` |
|
2827 | 2828 | Which template map style to use. The available options are the names of |
|
2828 | 2829 | subdirectories in the HTML templates path. (default: ``paper``) |
|
2829 | 2830 | Example: ``monoblue``. |
|
2830 | 2831 | |
|
2831 | 2832 | ``templates`` |
|
2832 | 2833 | Where to find the HTML templates. The default path to the HTML templates |
|
2833 | 2834 | can be obtained from ``hg debuginstall``. |
|
2834 | 2835 | |
|
2835 | 2836 | ``websub`` |
|
2836 | 2837 | ---------- |
|
2837 | 2838 | |
|
2838 | 2839 | Web substitution filter definition. You can use this section to |
|
2839 | 2840 | define a set of regular expression substitution patterns which |
|
2840 | 2841 | let you automatically modify the hgweb server output. |
|
2841 | 2842 | |
|
2842 | 2843 | The default hgweb templates only apply these substitution patterns |
|
2843 | 2844 | on the revision description fields. You can apply them anywhere |
|
2844 | 2845 | you want when you create your own templates by adding calls to the |
|
2845 | 2846 | "websub" filter (usually after calling the "escape" filter). |
|
2846 | 2847 | |
|
2847 | 2848 | This can be used, for example, to convert issue references to links |
|
2848 | 2849 | to your issue tracker, or to convert "markdown-like" syntax into |
|
2849 | 2850 | HTML (see the examples below). |
|
2850 | 2851 | |
|
2851 | 2852 | Each entry in this section names a substitution filter. |
|
2852 | 2853 | The value of each entry defines the substitution expression itself. |
|
2853 | 2854 | The websub expressions follow the old interhg extension syntax, |
|
2854 | 2855 | which in turn imitates the Unix sed replacement syntax:: |
|
2855 | 2856 | |
|
2856 | 2857 | patternname = s/SEARCH_REGEX/REPLACE_EXPRESSION/[i] |
|
2857 | 2858 | |
|
2858 | 2859 | You can use any separator other than "/". The final "i" is optional |
|
2859 | 2860 | and indicates that the search must be case insensitive. |
|
2860 | 2861 | |
|
2861 | 2862 | Examples:: |
|
2862 | 2863 | |
|
2863 | 2864 | [websub] |
|
2864 | 2865 | issues = s|issue(\d+)|<a href="http://bts.example.org/issue\1">issue\1</a>|i |
|
2865 | 2866 | italic = s/\b_(\S+)_\b/<i>\1<\/i>/ |
|
2866 | 2867 | bold = s/\*\b(\S+)\b\*/<b>\1<\/b>/ |
|
2867 | 2868 | |
|
2868 | 2869 | ``worker`` |
|
2869 | 2870 | ---------- |
|
2870 | 2871 | |
|
2871 | 2872 | Parallel master/worker configuration. We currently perform working |
|
2872 | 2873 | directory updates in parallel on Unix-like systems, which greatly |
|
2873 | 2874 | helps performance. |
|
2874 | 2875 | |
|
2875 | 2876 | ``enabled`` |
|
2876 | 2877 | Whether to enable workers code to be used. |
|
2877 | 2878 | (default: true) |
|
2878 | 2879 | |
|
2879 | 2880 | ``numcpus`` |
|
2880 | 2881 | Number of CPUs to use for parallel operations. A zero or |
|
2881 | 2882 | negative value is treated as ``use the default``. |
|
2882 | 2883 | (default: 4 or the number of CPUs on the system, whichever is larger) |
|
2883 | 2884 | |
|
2884 | 2885 | ``backgroundclose`` |
|
2885 | 2886 | Whether to enable closing file handles on background threads during certain |
|
2886 | 2887 | operations. Some platforms aren't very efficient at closing file |
|
2887 | 2888 | handles that have been written or appended to. By performing file closing |
|
2888 | 2889 | on background threads, file write rate can increase substantially. |
|
2889 | 2890 | (default: true on Windows, false elsewhere) |
|
2890 | 2891 | |
|
2891 | 2892 | ``backgroundcloseminfilecount`` |
|
2892 | 2893 | Minimum number of files required to trigger background file closing. |
|
2893 | 2894 | Operations not writing this many files won't start background close |
|
2894 | 2895 | threads. |
|
2895 | 2896 | (default: 2048) |
|
2896 | 2897 | |
|
2897 | 2898 | ``backgroundclosemaxqueue`` |
|
2898 | 2899 | The maximum number of opened file handles waiting to be closed in the |
|
2899 | 2900 | background. This option only has an effect if ``backgroundclose`` is |
|
2900 | 2901 | enabled. |
|
2901 | 2902 | (default: 384) |
|
2902 | 2903 | |
|
2903 | 2904 | ``backgroundclosethreadcount`` |
|
2904 | 2905 | Number of threads to process background file closes. Only relevant if |
|
2905 | 2906 | ``backgroundclose`` is enabled. |
|
2906 | 2907 | (default: 4) |
General Comments 0
You need to be logged in to leave comments.
Login now